[gdb/testsuite] Move valgrind-db-attach.{c,exp} to valgrind-bt.{c,exp}
[deliverable/binutils-gdb.git] / ld / ld.texi
CommitLineData
252b5132
RH
1\input texinfo
2@setfilename ld.info
219d1afa 3@c Copyright (C) 1991-2018 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 4@syncodeindex ky cp
dff70155 5@c man begin INCLUDE
252b5132
RH
6@include configdoc.texi
7@c (configdoc.texi is generated by the Makefile)
c428fa83 8@include bfdver.texi
dff70155 9@c man end
252b5132
RH
10
11@c @smallbook
12
ff5dcc92
SC
13@macro gcctabopt{body}
14@code{\body\}
15@end macro
16
0285c67d
NC
17@c man begin NAME
18@ifset man
19@c Configure for the generation of man pages
20@set UsesEnvVars
21@set GENERIC
0285c67d 22@set ARM
ac145307 23@set C6X
b8891f8d 24@set CSKY
49fa1e15 25@set H8300
0285c67d 26@set HPPA
0285c67d 27@set M68HC11
7fb9f789 28@set M68K
833794fc 29@set MIPS
3c3bdf30 30@set MMIX
2469cfa2 31@set MSP430
35c08157 32@set NDS32
78058a5e 33@set NIOSII
2a60a7a8
AM
34@set POWERPC
35@set POWERPC64
49fa1e15 36@set Renesas
b4cbbe8f 37@set S/390
49fa1e15
AM
38@set SPU
39@set TICOFF
2ca22b03 40@set WIN32
e0001a05 41@set XTENSA
0285c67d
NC
42@end ifset
43@c man end
44
9160ea82
AM
45@ifnottex
46@dircategory Software development
47@direntry
252b5132 48* Ld: (ld). The GNU linker.
9160ea82
AM
49@end direntry
50@end ifnottex
252b5132 51
0e9517a9 52@copying
e49e529d
JM
53This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker LD
54@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
55@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
56@end ifset
57version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 58
219d1afa 59Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2018 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 60
cf055d54 61Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 62under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
cf055d54
NC
63or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
64with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
65Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 66section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0e9517a9 67@end copying
252b5132
RH
68@iftex
69@finalout
70@setchapternewpage odd
71ba23f6 71@settitle The GNU linker
252b5132 72@titlepage
71ba23f6 73@title The GNU linker
252b5132 74@sp 1
e49e529d
JM
75@subtitle @code{ld}
76@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
77@subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
78@end ifset
252b5132
RH
79@subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
80@author Steve Chamberlain
81@author Ian Lance Taylor
252b5132
RH
82@page
83
84@tex
85{\parskip=0pt
704c465c
NC
86\hfill Red Hat Inc\par
87\hfill nickc\@credhat.com, doc\@redhat.com\par
71ba23f6 88\hfill {\it The GNU linker}\par
252b5132
RH
89\hfill Edited by Jeffrey Osier (jeffrey\@cygnus.com)\par
90}
91\global\parindent=0pt % Steve likes it this way.
92@end tex
93
94@vskip 0pt plus 1filll
0285c67d 95@c man begin COPYRIGHT
219d1afa 96Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2018 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 97
0285c67d 98Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 99under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
0285c67d
NC
100or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
101with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
102Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 103section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0285c67d 104@c man end
252b5132 105
252b5132
RH
106@end titlepage
107@end iftex
4ecceb71 108@contents
252b5132
RH
109@c FIXME: Talk about importance of *order* of args, cmds to linker!
110
84ec0e6d 111@ifnottex
252b5132 112@node Top
71ba23f6 113@top LD
e49e529d
JM
114This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker ld
115@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
116@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
117@end ifset
118version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 119
cf055d54 120This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
793c5807
NC
121Documentation License version 1.3. A copy of the license is included
122in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
cf055d54 123
252b5132
RH
124@menu
125* Overview:: Overview
126* Invocation:: Invocation
127* Scripts:: Linker Scripts
128@ifset GENERIC
129* Machine Dependent:: Machine Dependent Features
130@end ifset
131@ifclear GENERIC
132@ifset H8300
133* H8/300:: ld and the H8/300
134@end ifset
c2dcd04e
NC
135@ifset Renesas
136* Renesas:: ld and other Renesas micros
252b5132 137@end ifset
36f63dca
NC
138@ifset ARM
139* ARM:: ld and the ARM family
140@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
141@ifset M68HC11
142* M68HC11/68HC12:: ld and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
143@end ifset
7ca01ed9
NC
144@ifset HPPA
145* HPPA ELF32:: ld and HPPA 32-bit ELF
146@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
147@ifset M68K
148* M68K:: ld and Motorola 68K family
149@end ifset
833794fc
MR
150@ifset MIPS
151* MIPS:: ld and MIPS family
152@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
153@ifset POWERPC
154* PowerPC ELF32:: ld and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
155@end ifset
156@ifset POWERPC64
157* PowerPC64 ELF64:: ld and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
158@end ifset
b4cbbe8f
AK
159@ifset S/390
160* S/390 ELF:: ld and S/390 ELF Support
161@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
162@ifset SPU
163* SPU ELF:: ld and SPU ELF Support
164@end ifset
74459f0e
TW
165@ifset TICOFF
166* TI COFF:: ld and the TI COFF
167@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
168@ifset WIN32
169* Win32:: ld and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
170@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
171@ifset XTENSA
172* Xtensa:: ld and Xtensa Processors
173@end ifset
252b5132
RH
174@end ifclear
175@ifclear SingleFormat
176* BFD:: BFD
177@end ifclear
178@c Following blank line required for remaining bug in makeinfo conds/menus
179
180* Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
181* MRI:: MRI Compatible Script Files
704c465c 182* GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
370b66a1 183* LD Index:: LD Index
252b5132 184@end menu
84ec0e6d 185@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
186
187@node Overview
188@chapter Overview
189
190@cindex @sc{gnu} linker
191@cindex what is this?
0285c67d 192
0879a67a 193@ifset man
0285c67d 194@c man begin SYNOPSIS
ff5dcc92 195ld [@b{options}] @var{objfile} @dots{}
0285c67d
NC
196@c man end
197
198@c man begin SEEALSO
199ar(1), nm(1), objcopy(1), objdump(1), readelf(1) and
200the Info entries for @file{binutils} and
201@file{ld}.
202@c man end
203@end ifset
204
205@c man begin DESCRIPTION
206
ff5dcc92 207@command{ld} combines a number of object and archive files, relocates
252b5132 208their data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in
ff5dcc92 209compiling a program is to run @command{ld}.
252b5132 210
ff5dcc92 211@command{ld} accepts Linker Command Language files written in
252b5132
RH
212a superset of AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax,
213to provide explicit and total control over the linking process.
214
0285c67d
NC
215@ifset man
216@c For the man only
ece2d90e 217This man page does not describe the command language; see the
71ba23f6
NC
218@command{ld} entry in @code{info} for full details on the command
219language and on other aspects of the GNU linker.
0285c67d
NC
220@end ifset
221
252b5132 222@ifclear SingleFormat
ff5dcc92
SC
223This version of @command{ld} uses the general purpose BFD libraries
224to operate on object files. This allows @command{ld} to read, combine, and
252b5132
RH
225write object files in many different formats---for example, COFF or
226@code{a.out}. Different formats may be linked together to produce any
227available kind of object file. @xref{BFD}, for more information.
228@end ifclear
229
230Aside from its flexibility, the @sc{gnu} linker is more helpful than other
231linkers in providing diagnostic information. Many linkers abandon
232execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
ff5dcc92 233@command{ld} continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors
252b5132
RH
234(or, in some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
235
0285c67d
NC
236@c man end
237
252b5132
RH
238@node Invocation
239@chapter Invocation
240
0285c67d
NC
241@c man begin DESCRIPTION
242
ff5dcc92 243The @sc{gnu} linker @command{ld} is meant to cover a broad range of situations,
252b5132
RH
244and to be as compatible as possible with other linkers. As a result,
245you have many choices to control its behavior.
246
0285c67d
NC
247@c man end
248
252b5132
RH
249@ifset UsesEnvVars
250@menu
a05a5b64 251* Options:: Command-line Options
252b5132
RH
252* Environment:: Environment Variables
253@end menu
254
255@node Options
a05a5b64 256@section Command-line Options
252b5132
RH
257@end ifset
258
259@cindex command line
260@cindex options
0285c67d
NC
261
262@c man begin OPTIONS
263
252b5132
RH
264The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
265practice few of them are used in any particular context.
266@cindex standard Unix system
ff5dcc92 267For instance, a frequent use of @command{ld} is to link standard Unix
252b5132
RH
268object files on a standard, supported Unix system. On such a system, to
269link a file @code{hello.o}:
270
271@smallexample
272ld -o @var{output} /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
273@end smallexample
274
ff5dcc92 275This tells @command{ld} to produce a file called @var{output} as the
252b5132
RH
276result of linking the file @code{/lib/crt0.o} with @code{hello.o} and
277the library @code{libc.a}, which will come from the standard search
278directories. (See the discussion of the @samp{-l} option below.)
279
ff5dcc92 280Some of the command-line options to @command{ld} may be specified at any
511ab9e9
ILT
281point in the command line. However, options which refer to files, such
282as @samp{-l} or @samp{-T}, cause the file to be read at the point at
283which the option appears in the command line, relative to the object
284files and other file options. Repeating non-file options with a
285different argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
252b5132
RH
286occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
287option. Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
288noted in the descriptions below.
289
290@cindex object files
511ab9e9
ILT
291Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be linked
292together. They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with command-line
293options, except that an object file argument may not be placed between
294an option and its argument.
252b5132
RH
295
296Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you can
297specify other forms of binary input files using @samp{-l}, @samp{-R},
298and the script command language. If @emph{no} binary input files at all
299are specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
300message @samp{No input files}.
301
36f63dca 302If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
252b5132
RH
303assume that it is a linker script. A script specified in this way
304augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
305linker script or the one specified by using @samp{-T}). This feature
306permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
307or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
53d25da6
AM
308@code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} to load other objects. Specifying a
309script in this way merely augments the main linker script, with the
310extra commands placed after the main script; use the @samp{-T} option
311to replace the default linker script entirely, but note the effect of
312the @code{INSERT} command. @xref{Scripts}.
252b5132
RH
313
314For options whose names are a single letter,
315option arguments must either follow the option letter without intervening
316whitespace, or be given as separate arguments immediately following the
317option that requires them.
318
319For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two can
e4897a32 320precede the option name; for example, @samp{-trace-symbol} and
36f63dca 321@samp{--trace-symbol} are equivalent. Note---there is one exception to
e4897a32 322this rule. Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
ba1be17e 323only be preceded by two dashes. This is to reduce confusion with the
e4897a32
NC
324@samp{-o} option. So for example @samp{-omagic} sets the output file
325name to @samp{magic} whereas @samp{--omagic} sets the NMAGIC flag on the
326output.
327
328Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from the
329option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
330immediately following the option that requires them. For example,
331@samp{--trace-symbol foo} and @samp{--trace-symbol=foo} are equivalent.
332Unique abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are
333accepted.
252b5132 334
36f63dca 335Note---if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler driver
a05a5b64 336(e.g. @samp{gcc}) then all the linker command-line options should be
fa19fce0
NC
337prefixed by @samp{-Wl,} (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
338compiler driver) like this:
4e53152f
NC
339
340@smallexample
2509a395 341 gcc -Wl,--start-group foo.o bar.o -Wl,--end-group
4e53152f
NC
342@end smallexample
343
344This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
2509a395
SL
345silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link. Confusion
346may also arise when passing options that require values through a
347driver, as the use of a space between option and argument acts as
348a separator, and causes the driver to pass only the option to the linker
349and the argument to the compiler. In this case, it is simplest to use
350the joined forms of both single- and multiple-letter options, such as:
351
352@smallexample
353 gcc foo.o bar.o -Wl,-eENTRY -Wl,-Map=a.map
354@end smallexample
4e53152f 355
a05a5b64 356Here is a table of the generic command-line switches accepted by the GNU
4e53152f
NC
357linker:
358
ff5dcc92 359@table @gcctabopt
38fc1cb1 360@include at-file.texi
dff70155 361
2509a395
SL
362@kindex -a @var{keyword}
363@item -a @var{keyword}
252b5132
RH
364This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility. The @var{keyword}
365argument must be one of the strings @samp{archive}, @samp{shared}, or
366@samp{default}. @samp{-aarchive} is functionally equivalent to
367@samp{-Bstatic}, and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent
368to @samp{-Bdynamic}. This option may be used any number of times.
369
7ee314fa
AM
370@kindex --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
371@item --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
372Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_AUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
373@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
374specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_AUDIT}
375will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. If the linker
376finds an object with an audit entry while searching for shared libraries,
9d5777a3 377it will add a corresponding @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry in the output file.
7ee314fa 378This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit
9d5777a3 379interface.
7ee314fa 380
252b5132
RH
381@ifclear SingleFormat
382@cindex binary input format
383@kindex -b @var{format}
384@kindex --format=@var{format}
385@cindex input format
386@cindex input format
387@item -b @var{input-format}
388@itemx --format=@var{input-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
389@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
390file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 391@samp{-b} option to specify the binary format for input object files
ff5dcc92 392that follow this option on the command line. Even when @command{ld} is
252b5132 393configured to support alternative object formats, you don't usually need
ff5dcc92 394to specify this, as @command{ld} should be configured to expect as a
252b5132
RH
395default input format the most usual format on each machine.
396@var{input-format} is a text string, the name of a particular format
397supported by the BFD libraries. (You can list the available binary
398formats with @samp{objdump -i}.)
399@xref{BFD}.
400
401You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an unusual
402binary format. You can also use @samp{-b} to switch formats explicitly (when
403linking object files of different formats), by including
404@samp{-b @var{input-format}} before each group of object files in a
a1ab1d2a 405particular format.
252b5132
RH
406
407The default format is taken from the environment variable
408@code{GNUTARGET}.
409@ifset UsesEnvVars
410@xref{Environment}.
411@end ifset
412You can also define the input format from a script, using the command
0285c67d
NC
413@code{TARGET};
414@ifclear man
415see @ref{Format Commands}.
416@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
417@end ifclear
418
419@kindex -c @var{MRI-cmdfile}
420@kindex --mri-script=@var{MRI-cmdfile}
421@cindex compatibility, MRI
422@item -c @var{MRI-commandfile}
423@itemx --mri-script=@var{MRI-commandfile}
ff5dcc92 424For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, @command{ld} accepts script
252b5132 425files written in an alternate, restricted command language, described in
0285c67d
NC
426@ifclear man
427@ref{MRI,,MRI Compatible Script Files}.
428@end ifclear
429@ifset man
430the MRI Compatible Script Files section of GNU ld documentation.
431@end ifset
432Introduce MRI script files with
252b5132 433the option @samp{-c}; use the @samp{-T} option to run linker
ff5dcc92
SC
434scripts written in the general-purpose @command{ld} scripting language.
435If @var{MRI-cmdfile} does not exist, @command{ld} looks for it in the directories
252b5132
RH
436specified by any @samp{-L} options.
437
438@cindex common allocation
439@kindex -d
440@kindex -dc
441@kindex -dp
a1ab1d2a 442@item -d
252b5132
RH
443@itemx -dc
444@itemx -dp
445These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported for
446compatibility with other linkers. They assign space to common symbols
447even if a relocatable output file is specified (with @samp{-r}). The
448script command @code{FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
449@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
450
7ee314fa
AM
451@kindex --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
452@kindex -P @var{AUDITLIB}
453@item --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
454@itemx -P @var{AUDITLIB}
455Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
456@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
457specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_DEPAUDIT}
458will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. This
459option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit interface.
9d5777a3 460The -P option is provided for Solaris compatibility.
7ee314fa 461
252b5132
RH
462@cindex entry point, from command line
463@kindex -e @var{entry}
464@kindex --entry=@var{entry}
a1ab1d2a 465@item -e @var{entry}
252b5132
RH
466@itemx --entry=@var{entry}
467Use @var{entry} as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
468program, rather than the default entry point. If there is no symbol
469named @var{entry}, the linker will try to parse @var{entry} as a number,
470and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted in
471base 10; you may use a leading @samp{0x} for base 16, or a leading
472@samp{0} for base 8). @xref{Entry Point}, for a discussion of defaults
473and other ways of specifying the entry point.
474
b58f81ae
DJ
475@kindex --exclude-libs
476@item --exclude-libs @var{lib},@var{lib},...
477Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should not be automatically
e1c37eb5 478exported. The library names may be delimited by commas or colons. Specifying
b58f81ae
DJ
479@code{--exclude-libs ALL} excludes symbols in all archive libraries from
480automatic export. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted
481port of the linker and for ELF targeted ports. For i386 PE, symbols
482explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of this
483option. For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this option will
484be treated as hidden.
485
e1c37eb5
DK
486@kindex --exclude-modules-for-implib
487@item --exclude-modules-for-implib @var{module},@var{module},...
488Specifies a list of object files or archive members, from which symbols
489should not be automatically exported, but which should be copied wholesale
490into the import library being generated during the link. The module names
491may be delimited by commas or colons, and must match exactly the filenames
492used by @command{ld} to open the files; for archive members, this is simply
493the member name, but for object files the name listed must include and
494match precisely any path used to specify the input file on the linker's
495command-line. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted port
496of the linker. Symbols explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported,
497regardless of this option.
498
252b5132
RH
499@cindex dynamic symbol table
500@kindex -E
501@kindex --export-dynamic
267e2722 502@kindex --no-export-dynamic
252b5132
RH
503@item -E
504@itemx --export-dynamic
267e2722
CD
505@itemx --no-export-dynamic
506When creating a dynamically linked executable, using the @option{-E}
507option or the @option{--export-dynamic} option causes the linker to add
508all symbols to the dynamic symbol table. The dynamic symbol table is the
509set of symbols which are visible from dynamic objects at run time.
510
511If you do not use either of these options (or use the
512@option{--no-export-dynamic} option to restore the default behavior), the
513dynamic symbol table will normally contain only those symbols which are
514referenced by some dynamic object mentioned in the link.
252b5132
RH
515
516If you use @code{dlopen} to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
517back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
518dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
519linking the program itself.
520
55255dae 521You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should
cb840a31 522be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports it.
55255dae 523See the description of @samp{--dynamic-list}.
cb840a31 524
8b747e1a
DK
525Note that this option is specific to ELF targeted ports. PE targets
526support a similar function to export all symbols from a DLL or EXE; see
527the description of @samp{--export-all-symbols} below.
528
36f63dca 529@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
530@cindex big-endian objects
531@cindex endianness
532@kindex -EB
533@item -EB
534Link big-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
535
536@cindex little-endian objects
537@kindex -EL
538@item -EL
539Link little-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
36f63dca 540@end ifclear
252b5132 541
2509a395
SL
542@kindex -f @var{name}
543@kindex --auxiliary=@var{name}
544@item -f @var{name}
545@itemx --auxiliary=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
546When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY field
547to the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol
548table of the shared object should be used as an auxiliary filter on the
549symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
550
551If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
552run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY field. If
553the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter object, it will
554first check whether there is a definition in the shared object
555@var{name}. If there is one, it will be used instead of the definition
556in the filter object. The shared object @var{name} need not exist.
557Thus the shared object @var{name} may be used to provide an alternative
558implementation of certain functions, perhaps for debugging or for
559machine specific performance.
560
561This option may be specified more than once. The DT_AUXILIARY entries
562will be created in the order in which they appear on the command line.
563
2509a395
SL
564@kindex -F @var{name}
565@kindex --filter=@var{name}
252b5132 566@item -F @var{name}
2509a395 567@itemx --filter=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
568When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER field to
569the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol table
570of the shared object which is being created should be used as a filter
571on the symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
572
573If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
574run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER field. The
575dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the symbol table of the
576filter object as usual, but it will actually link to the definitions
577found in the shared object @var{name}. Thus the filter object can be
578used to select a subset of the symbols provided by the object
579@var{name}.
580
ff5dcc92 581Some older linkers used the @option{-F} option throughout a compilation
252b5132 582toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and output
36f63dca
NC
583object files.
584@ifclear SingleFormat
585The @sc{gnu} linker uses other mechanisms for this purpose: the
ece2d90e 586@option{-b}, @option{--format}, @option{--oformat} options, the
252b5132 587@code{TARGET} command in linker scripts, and the @code{GNUTARGET}
36f63dca
NC
588environment variable.
589@end ifclear
590The @sc{gnu} linker will ignore the @option{-F} option when not
591creating an ELF shared object.
252b5132 592
3dbf70a2 593@cindex finalization function
2509a395
SL
594@kindex -fini=@var{name}
595@item -fini=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
596When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
597executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to the
598address of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_fini} as
599the function to call.
600
252b5132
RH
601@kindex -g
602@item -g
603Ignored. Provided for compatibility with other tools.
604
2509a395
SL
605@kindex -G @var{value}
606@kindex --gpsize=@var{value}
252b5132 607@cindex object size
2509a395 608@item -G @var{value}
252b5132
RH
609@itemx --gpsize=@var{value}
610Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP register to
611@var{size}. This is only meaningful for object file formats such as
e8044f35 612MIPS ELF that support putting large and small objects into different
252b5132
RH
613sections. This is ignored for other object file formats.
614
615@cindex runtime library name
2509a395 616@kindex -h @var{name}
252b5132 617@kindex -soname=@var{name}
2509a395 618@item -h @var{name}
252b5132
RH
619@itemx -soname=@var{name}
620When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME field to
621the specified name. When an executable is linked with a shared object
622which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the executable is run the dynamic
623linker will attempt to load the shared object specified by the DT_SONAME
624field rather than the using the file name given to the linker.
625
626@kindex -i
627@cindex incremental link
628@item -i
629Perform an incremental link (same as option @samp{-r}).
630
3dbf70a2 631@cindex initialization function
2509a395
SL
632@kindex -init=@var{name}
633@item -init=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
634When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
635executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to the address
636of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_init} as the
637function to call.
638
252b5132 639@cindex archive files, from cmd line
2509a395 640@kindex -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf 641@kindex --library=@var{namespec}
2509a395 642@item -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf
RS
643@itemx --library=@var{namespec}
644Add the archive or object file specified by @var{namespec} to the
645list of files to link. This option may be used any number of times.
646If @var{namespec} is of the form @file{:@var{filename}}, @command{ld}
07d8eb55 647will search the library path for a file called @var{filename}, otherwise it
bcb674cf 648will search the library path for a file called @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}.
252b5132 649
ff5dcc92 650On systems which support shared libraries, @command{ld} may also search for
bcb674cf
RS
651files other than @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. Specifically, on ELF
652and SunOS systems, @command{ld} will search a directory for a library
653called @file{lib@var{namespec}.so} before searching for one called
654@file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. (By convention, a @code{.so} extension
655indicates a shared library.) Note that this behavior does not apply
656to @file{:@var{filename}}, which always specifies a file called
657@var{filename}.
252b5132
RH
658
659The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where it is
660specified on the command line. If the archive defines a symbol which
661was undefined in some object which appeared before the archive on the
662command line, the linker will include the appropriate file(s) from the
663archive. However, an undefined symbol in an object appearing later on
664the command line will not cause the linker to search the archive again.
665
ff5dcc92 666See the @option{-(} option for a way to force the linker to search
252b5132
RH
667archives multiple times.
668
669You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
670
671@ifset GENERIC
672This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers. However,
ff5dcc92 673if you are using @command{ld} on AIX, note that it is different from the
252b5132
RH
674behaviour of the AIX linker.
675@end ifset
676
677@cindex search directory, from cmd line
2509a395 678@kindex -L @var{dir}
252b5132 679@kindex --library-path=@var{dir}
2509a395 680@item -L @var{searchdir}
252b5132 681@itemx --library-path=@var{searchdir}
ff5dcc92
SC
682Add path @var{searchdir} to the list of paths that @command{ld} will search
683for archive libraries and @command{ld} control scripts. You may use this
252b5132
RH
684option any number of times. The directories are searched in the order
685in which they are specified on the command line. Directories specified
686on the command line are searched before the default directories. All
ff5dcc92 687@option{-L} options apply to all @option{-l} options, regardless of the
7d24f02c
KH
688order in which the options appear. @option{-L} options do not affect
689how @command{ld} searches for a linker script unless @option{-T}
690option is specified.
252b5132 691
3aa2d05a
NC
692If @var{searchdir} begins with @code{=} or @code{$SYSROOT}, then this
693prefix will be replaced by the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, controlled by the
694@samp{--sysroot} option, or specified when the linker is configured.
9c8ebd6a 695
252b5132
RH
696@ifset UsesEnvVars
697The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
ff5dcc92 698@samp{-L}) depends on which emulation mode @command{ld} is using, and in
252b5132
RH
699some cases also on how it was configured. @xref{Environment}.
700@end ifset
701
702The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
703@code{SEARCH_DIR} command. Directories specified this way are searched
704at the point in which the linker script appears in the command line.
705
706@cindex emulation
707@kindex -m @var{emulation}
2509a395 708@item -m @var{emulation}
252b5132
RH
709Emulate the @var{emulation} linker. You can list the available
710emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options.
711
712If the @samp{-m} option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
713@code{LDEMULATION} environment variable, if that is defined.
714
715Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
716configured.
717
718@cindex link map
719@kindex -M
720@kindex --print-map
721@item -M
722@itemx --print-map
723Print a link map to the standard output. A link map provides
724information about the link, including the following:
725
726@itemize @bullet
727@item
3b83e13a 728Where object files are mapped into memory.
252b5132
RH
729@item
730How common symbols are allocated.
731@item
732All archive members included in the link, with a mention of the symbol
733which caused the archive member to be brought in.
3b83e13a
NC
734@item
735The values assigned to symbols.
736
737Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression which
738involves a reference to a previous value of the same symbol may not
739have correct result displayed in the link map. This is because the
740linker discards intermediate results and only retains the final value
741of an expression. Under such circumstances the linker will display
742the final value enclosed by square brackets. Thus for example a
743linker script containing:
744
745@smallexample
746 foo = 1
747 foo = foo * 4
748 foo = foo + 8
749@end smallexample
750
751will produce the following output in the link map if the @option{-M}
752option is used:
753
754@smallexample
755 0x00000001 foo = 0x1
756 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo * 0x4)
757 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo + 0x8)
758@end smallexample
759
760See @ref{Expressions} for more information about expressions in linker
761scripts.
252b5132
RH
762@end itemize
763
764@kindex -n
765@cindex read-only text
766@cindex NMAGIC
767@kindex --nmagic
768@item -n
769@itemx --nmagic
90f5d9d9
JZ
770Turn off page alignment of sections, and disable linking against shared
771libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
772mark the output as @code{NMAGIC}.
252b5132
RH
773
774@kindex -N
775@kindex --omagic
776@cindex read/write from cmd line
777@cindex OMAGIC
a1ab1d2a 778@item -N
252b5132
RH
779@itemx --omagic
780Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable. Also, do
63fd3b82
NC
781not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against shared
782libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
4d8907ac
DS
783mark the output as @code{OMAGIC}. Note: Although a writable text section
784is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform to the format
785specification published by Microsoft.
63fd3b82
NC
786
787@kindex --no-omagic
788@cindex OMAGIC
789@item --no-omagic
790This option negates most of the effects of the @option{-N} option. It
791sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment to
792be page-aligned. Note - this option does not enable linking against
793shared libraries. Use @option{-Bdynamic} for this.
252b5132
RH
794
795@kindex -o @var{output}
796@kindex --output=@var{output}
797@cindex naming the output file
798@item -o @var{output}
799@itemx --output=@var{output}
ff5dcc92 800Use @var{output} as the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; if this
252b5132
RH
801option is not specified, the name @file{a.out} is used by default. The
802script command @code{OUTPUT} can also specify the output file name.
803
804@kindex -O @var{level}
805@cindex generating optimized output
806@item -O @var{level}
ff5dcc92 807If @var{level} is a numeric values greater than zero @command{ld} optimizes
252b5132 808the output. This might take significantly longer and therefore probably
98c503ac
NC
809should only be enabled for the final binary. At the moment this
810option only affects ELF shared library generation. Future releases of
811the linker may make more use of this option. Also currently there is
812no difference in the linker's behaviour for different non-zero values
813of this option. Again this may change with future releases.
252b5132 814
387dd777
DP
815@kindex -plugin @var{name}
816@item -plugin @var{name}
817Involve a plugin in the linking process. The @var{name} parameter is
818the absolute filename of the plugin. Usually this parameter is
819automatically added by the complier, when using link time
820optimization, but users can also add their own plugins if they so
821wish.
822
823Note that the location of the compiler originated plugins is different
824from the place where the @command{ar}, @command{nm} and
825@command{ranlib} programs search for their plugins. In order for
826those commands to make use of a compiler based plugin it must first be
827copied into the @file{$@{libdir@}/bfd-plugins} directory. All gcc
828based linker plugins are backward compatible, so it is sufficient to
6c19b93b 829just copy in the newest one.
387dd777 830
26278bb8
UD
831@kindex --push-state
832@cindex push state governing input file handling
833@item --push-state
834The @option{--push-state} allows to preserve the current state of the
835flags which govern the input file handling so that they can all be
836restored with one corresponding @option{--pop-state} option.
837
838The option which are covered are: @option{-Bdynamic}, @option{-Bstatic},
839@option{-dn}, @option{-dy}, @option{-call_shared}, @option{-non_shared},
840@option{-static}, @option{-N}, @option{-n}, @option{--whole-archive},
841@option{--no-whole-archive}, @option{-r}, @option{-Ur},
842@option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}, @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries},
843@option{--as-needed}, @option{--no-as-needed}, and @option{-a}.
844
845One target for this option are specifications for @file{pkg-config}. When
846used with the @option{--libs} option all possibly needed libraries are
847listed and then possibly linked with all the time. It is better to return
848something as follows:
849
850@smallexample
851-Wl,--push-state,--as-needed -libone -libtwo -Wl,--pop-state
852@end smallexample
853
854@kindex --pop-state
855@cindex pop state governing input file handling
67cecaba 856@item --pop-state
26278bb8
UD
857Undoes the effect of --push-state, restores the previous values of the
858flags governing input file handling.
859
a712da20
NC
860@kindex -q
861@kindex --emit-relocs
862@cindex retain relocations in final executable
863@item -q
864@itemx --emit-relocs
ba1be17e 865Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
a712da20
NC
866Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this information in
867order to perform correct modifications of executables. This results
868in larger executables.
869
dbab7a7b
NC
870This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
871
4f471f39
RS
872@kindex --force-dynamic
873@cindex forcing the creation of dynamic sections
874@item --force-dynamic
875Force the output file to have dynamic sections. This option is specific
876to VxWorks targets.
877
252b5132
RH
878@cindex partial link
879@cindex relocatable output
880@kindex -r
1049f94e 881@kindex --relocatable
252b5132 882@item -r
1049f94e 883@itemx --relocatable
252b5132 884Generate relocatable output---i.e., generate an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 885turn serve as input to @command{ld}. This is often called @dfn{partial
252b5132
RH
886linking}. As a side effect, in environments that support standard Unix
887magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic number to
888@code{OMAGIC}.
ff5dcc92 889@c ; see @option{-N}.
252b5132
RH
890If this option is not specified, an absolute file is produced. When
891linking C++ programs, this option @emph{will not} resolve references to
892constructors; to do that, use @samp{-Ur}.
893
62bf86b4
HPN
894When an input file does not have the same format as the output file,
895partial linking is only supported if that input file does not contain any
896relocations. Different output formats can have further restrictions; for
897example some @code{a.out}-based formats do not support partial linking
898with input files in other formats at all.
899
252b5132
RH
900This option does the same thing as @samp{-i}.
901
902@kindex -R @var{file}
903@kindex --just-symbols=@var{file}
904@cindex symbol-only input
905@item -R @var{filename}
906@itemx --just-symbols=@var{filename}
907Read symbol names and their addresses from @var{filename}, but do not
908relocate it or include it in the output. This allows your output file
909to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined in other
910programs. You may use this option more than once.
911
ff5dcc92 912For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 913followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 914the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
915
916@kindex -s
917@kindex --strip-all
918@cindex strip all symbols
a1ab1d2a 919@item -s
252b5132
RH
920@itemx --strip-all
921Omit all symbol information from the output file.
922
923@kindex -S
924@kindex --strip-debug
925@cindex strip debugger symbols
a1ab1d2a 926@item -S
252b5132
RH
927@itemx --strip-debug
928Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the output file.
929
a70f34c0
NC
930@kindex --strip-discarded
931@kindex --no-strip-discarded
932@item --strip-discarded
933@itemx --no-strip-discarded
934Omit (or do not omit) global symbols defined in discarded sections.
935Enabled by default.
936
252b5132
RH
937@kindex -t
938@kindex --trace
939@cindex input files, displaying
a1ab1d2a 940@item -t
252b5132 941@itemx --trace
ff5dcc92 942Print the names of the input files as @command{ld} processes them.
252b5132
RH
943
944@kindex -T @var{script}
945@kindex --script=@var{script}
946@cindex script files
947@item -T @var{scriptfile}
948@itemx --script=@var{scriptfile}
949Use @var{scriptfile} as the linker script. This script replaces
ff5dcc92 950@command{ld}'s default linker script (rather than adding to it), so
252b5132 951@var{commandfile} must specify everything necessary to describe the
114283d8
NC
952output file. @xref{Scripts}. If @var{scriptfile} does not exist in
953the current directory, @code{ld} looks for it in the directories
954specified by any preceding @samp{-L} options. Multiple @samp{-T}
955options accumulate.
252b5132 956
14be8564
L
957@kindex -dT @var{script}
958@kindex --default-script=@var{script}
959@cindex script files
960@item -dT @var{scriptfile}
961@itemx --default-script=@var{scriptfile}
962Use @var{scriptfile} as the default linker script. @xref{Scripts}.
963
964This option is similar to the @option{--script} option except that
965processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
966command line has been processed. This allows options placed after the
967@option{--default-script} option on the command line to affect the
968behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the linker
969command line cannot be directly controlled by the user. (eg because
970the command line is being constructed by another tool, such as
971@samp{gcc}).
972
252b5132
RH
973@kindex -u @var{symbol}
974@kindex --undefined=@var{symbol}
975@cindex undefined symbol
976@item -u @var{symbol}
977@itemx --undefined=@var{symbol}
978Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
979symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
980modules from standard libraries. @samp{-u} may be repeated with
981different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols. This
982option is equivalent to the @code{EXTERN} linker script command.
983
0a618243
AB
984If this option is being used to force additional modules to be pulled
985into the link, and if it is an error for the symbol to remain
986undefined, then the option @option{--require-defined} should be used
987instead.
988
989@kindex --require-defined=@var{symbol}
990@cindex symbols, require defined
991@cindex defined symbol
992@item --require-defined=@var{symbol}
993Require that @var{symbol} is defined in the output file. This option
994is the same as option @option{--undefined} except that if @var{symbol}
995is not defined in the output file then the linker will issue an error
996and exit. The same effect can be achieved in a linker script by using
997@code{EXTERN}, @code{ASSERT} and @code{DEFINED} together. This option
998can be used multiple times to require additional symbols.
999
252b5132
RH
1000@kindex -Ur
1001@cindex constructors
a1ab1d2a 1002@item -Ur
252b5132
RH
1003For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
1004@samp{-r}: it generates relocatable output---i.e., an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 1005turn serve as input to @command{ld}. When linking C++ programs, @samp{-Ur}
252b5132
RH
1006@emph{does} resolve references to constructors, unlike @samp{-r}.
1007It does not work to use @samp{-Ur} on files that were themselves linked
1008with @samp{-Ur}; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
1009be added to. Use @samp{-Ur} only for the last partial link, and
1010@samp{-r} for the others.
1011
c005eb9e
AB
1012@kindex --orphan-handling=@var{MODE}
1013@cindex orphan sections
1014@cindex sections, orphan
1015@item --orphan-handling=@var{MODE}
1016Control how orphan sections are handled. An orphan section is one not
1017specifically mentioned in a linker script. @xref{Orphan Sections}.
1018
1019@var{MODE} can have any of the following values:
1020
1021@table @code
1022@item place
1023Orphan sections are placed into a suitable output section following
1024the strategy described in @ref{Orphan Sections}. The option
d2732b69 1025@samp{--unique} also affects how sections are placed.
c005eb9e
AB
1026
1027@item discard
1028All orphan sections are discarded, by placing them in the
1029@samp{/DISCARD/} section (@pxref{Output Section Discarding}).
1030
1031@item warn
1032The linker will place the orphan section as for @code{place} and also
1033issue a warning.
1034
1035@item error
1036The linker will exit with an error if any orphan section is found.
1037@end table
1038
1039The default if @samp{--orphan-handling} is not given is @code{place}.
1040
577a0623
AM
1041@kindex --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
1042@item --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
1043Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
1044@var{SECTION}, or if the optional wildcard @var{SECTION} argument is
1045missing, for every orphan input section. An orphan section is one not
1046specifically mentioned in a linker script. You may use this option
1047multiple times on the command line; It prevents the normal merging of
1048input sections with the same name, overriding output section assignments
1049in a linker script.
a854a4a7 1050
252b5132
RH
1051@kindex -v
1052@kindex -V
1053@kindex --version
1054@cindex version
1055@item -v
1056@itemx --version
1057@itemx -V
ff5dcc92 1058Display the version number for @command{ld}. The @option{-V} option also
252b5132
RH
1059lists the supported emulations.
1060
1061@kindex -x
1062@kindex --discard-all
1063@cindex deleting local symbols
1064@item -x
1065@itemx --discard-all
1066Delete all local symbols.
1067
1068@kindex -X
1069@kindex --discard-locals
1070@cindex local symbols, deleting
a1ab1d2a 1071@item -X
252b5132 1072@itemx --discard-locals
3c68c38f
BW
1073Delete all temporary local symbols. (These symbols start with
1074system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
1075or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.)
252b5132
RH
1076
1077@kindex -y @var{symbol}
1078@kindex --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1079@cindex symbol tracing
1080@item -y @var{symbol}
1081@itemx --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1082Print the name of each linked file in which @var{symbol} appears. This
1083option may be given any number of times. On many systems it is necessary
1084to prepend an underscore.
1085
1086This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your link but
1087don't know where the reference is coming from.
1088
1089@kindex -Y @var{path}
1090@item -Y @var{path}
1091Add @var{path} to the default library search path. This option exists
1092for Solaris compatibility.
1093
1094@kindex -z @var{keyword}
1095@item -z @var{keyword}
cd6d6c15
NC
1096The recognized keywords are:
1097@table @samp
1098
e6e2dfbd
AM
1099@item bndplt
1100Always generate BND prefix in PLT entries. Supported for Linux/x86_64.
1101
1102@item call-nop=prefix-addr
1103@itemx call-nop=suffix-nop
1104@itemx call-nop=prefix-@var{byte}
1105@itemx call-nop=suffix-@var{byte}
1106Specify the 1-byte @code{NOP} padding when transforming indirect call
1107to a locally defined function, foo, via its GOT slot.
1108@option{call-nop=prefix-addr} generates @code{0x67 call foo}.
1109@option{call-nop=suffix-nop} generates @code{call foo 0x90}.
1110@option{call-nop=prefix-@var{byte}} generates @code{@var{byte} call foo}.
1111@option{call-nop=suffix-@var{byte}} generates @code{call foo @var{byte}}.
1112Supported for i386 and x86_64.
1113
cd6d6c15 1114@item combreloc
e6e2dfbd
AM
1115@itemx nocombreloc
1116Combine multiple dynamic relocation sections and sort to improve
1117dynamic symbol lookup caching. Do not do this if @samp{nocombreloc}.
cd6d6c15 1118
b8871f35 1119@item common
e6e2dfbd
AM
1120@itemx nocommon
1121Generate common symbols with STT_COMMON type during a relocatable
1122link. Use STT_OBJECT type if @samp{nocommon}.
1123
1124@item common-page-size=@var{value}
1125Set the page size most commonly used to @var{value}. Memory image
1126layout will be optimized to minimize memory pages if the system is
1127using pages of this size.
b8871f35 1128
cd6d6c15 1129@item defs
97a232d7
NC
1130Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1131is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1132This option is the inverse of @samp{-z undefs}.
cd6d6c15 1133
e6e2dfbd
AM
1134@item dynamic-undefined-weak
1135@itemx nodynamic-undefined-weak
1136Make undefined weak symbols dynamic when building a dynamic object,
1137if they are referenced from a regular object file and not forced local
1138by symbol visibility or versioning. Do not make them dynamic if
1139@samp{nodynamic-undefined-weak}. If neither option is given, a target
1140may default to either option being in force, or make some other
1141selection of undefined weak symbols dynamic. Not all targets support
1142these options.
1143
6aa29e7b
JJ
1144@item execstack
1145Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
1146
b039ef04
L
1147@item global
1148This option is only meaningful when building a shared object. It makes
1149the symbols defined by this shared object available for symbol resolution
1150of subsequently loaded libraries.
1151
93ab9c0d
NC
1152@item globalaudit
1153This option is only meaningful when building a dynamic executable.
1154This option marks the executable as requiring global auditing by
1155setting the @code{DF_1_GLOBAUDIT} bit in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} dynamic
1156tag. Global auditing requires that any auditing library defined via
a05a5b64 1157the @option{--depaudit} or @option{-P} command-line options be run for
6c19b93b 1158all dynamic objects loaded by the application.
93ab9c0d 1159
e6e2dfbd
AM
1160@item ibtplt
1161Generate Intel Indirect Branch Tracking (IBT) enabled PLT entries.
1162Supported for Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
1163
8df93cb5 1164@item ibt
e6e2dfbd
AM
1165Generate GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_IBT in .note.gnu.property section
1166to indicate compatibility with IBT. This also implies @option{ibtplt}.
1167Supported for Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
1168
cd6d6c15
NC
1169@item initfirst
1170This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
1171It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will occur
1172before the runtime initialization of any other objects brought into
1173the process at the same time. Similarly the runtime finalization of
1174the object will occur after the runtime finalization of any other
1175objects.
1176
1177@item interpose
e6e2dfbd
AM
1178Specify that the dynamic loader should modify its symbol search order
1179so that symbols in this shared library interpose all other shared
1180libraries not so marked.
cd6d6c15 1181
5fa222e4
AM
1182@item lazy
1183When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1184dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to the point when
1185the function is called (lazy binding), rather than at load time.
1186Lazy binding is the default.
1187
cd6d6c15 1188@item loadfltr
e6e2dfbd 1189Specify that the object's filters be processed immediately at runtime.
cd6d6c15 1190
e6e2dfbd
AM
1191@item max-page-size=@var{value}
1192Set the maximum memory page size supported to @var{value}.
cd6d6c15 1193
e6e2dfbd
AM
1194@item muldefs
1195Allow multiple definitions.
b8871f35 1196
cd6d6c15 1197@item nocopyreloc
daf220f0
AM
1198Disable linker generated .dynbss variables used in place of variables
1199defined in shared libraries. May result in dynamic text relocations.
cd6d6c15
NC
1200
1201@item nodefaultlib
e6e2dfbd
AM
1202Specify that the dynamic loader search for dependencies of this object
1203should ignore any default library search paths.
cd6d6c15
NC
1204
1205@item nodelete
e6e2dfbd 1206Specify that the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
cd6d6c15
NC
1207
1208@item nodlopen
e6e2dfbd 1209Specify that the object is not available to @code{dlopen}.
cd6d6c15
NC
1210
1211@item nodump
e6e2dfbd 1212Specify that the object can not be dumped by @code{dldump}.
cd6d6c15 1213
6aa29e7b
JJ
1214@item noexecstack
1215Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
1216
e6e2dfbd
AM
1217@item noextern-protected-data
1218Don't treat protected data symbols as external when building a shared
1219library. This option overrides the linker backend default. It can be
1220used to work around incorrect relocations against protected data symbols
1221generated by compiler. Updates on protected data symbols by another
1222module aren't visible to the resulting shared library. Supported for
1223i386 and x86-64.
8dfef1bd 1224
e6e2dfbd
AM
1225@item noreloc-overflow
1226Disable relocation overflow check. This can be used to disable
1227relocation overflow check if there will be no dynamic relocation
1228overflow at run-time. Supported for x86_64.
6aa29e7b 1229
cd6d6c15
NC
1230@item now
1231When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1232dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the program is started, or
e6e2dfbd
AM
1233when the shared library is loaded by dlopen, instead of deferring
1234function call resolution to the point when the function is first
1235called.
cd6d6c15
NC
1236
1237@item origin
e6e2dfbd 1238Specify that the object requires @samp{$ORIGIN} handling in paths.
cd6d6c15 1239
6aa29e7b 1240@item relro
e6e2dfbd 1241@itemx norelro
def5c83c
AM
1242Create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object. This
1243specifies a memory segment that should be made read-only after
1244relocation, if supported. Specifying @samp{common-page-size} smaller
1245than the system page size will render this protection ineffective.
e6e2dfbd 1246Don't create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment if @samp{norelro}.
6aa29e7b 1247
47acac12
L
1248@item separate-code
1249@itemx noseparate-code
1250Create separate code @code{PT_LOAD} segment header in the object. This
1251specifies a memory segment that should contain only instructions and must
1252be in wholly disjoint pages from any other data. Don't create separate
1253code @code{PT_LOAD} segment if @samp{noseparate-code} is used.
1254
e6e2dfbd
AM
1255@item shstk
1256Generate GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_SHSTK in .note.gnu.property section
1257to indicate compatibility with Intel Shadow Stack. Supported for
1258Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
24718e3b 1259
04c3a755 1260@item stack-size=@var{value}
e6e2dfbd 1261Specify a stack size for an ELF @code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment.
04c3a755
NS
1262Specifying zero will override any default non-zero sized
1263@code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment creation.
1264
e6e2dfbd
AM
1265@item text
1266@itemx notext
1267@itemx textoff
1268Report an error if DT_TEXTREL is set, i.e., if the binary has dynamic
1269relocations in read-only sections. Don't report an error if
1270@samp{notext} or @samp{textoff}.
48580982 1271
97a232d7
NC
1272@item undefs
1273Do not report unresolved symbol references from regular object files,
1274either when creating an executable, or when creating a shared library.
1275This option is the inverse of @samp{-z defs}.
1276
cd6d6c15
NC
1277@end table
1278
ece2d90e 1279Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
252b5132
RH
1280
1281@kindex -(
1282@cindex groups of archives
1283@item -( @var{archives} -)
1284@itemx --start-group @var{archives} --end-group
1285The @var{archives} should be a list of archive files. They may be
1286either explicit file names, or @samp{-l} options.
1287
1288The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new undefined
1289references are created. Normally, an archive is searched only once in
1290the order that it is specified on the command line. If a symbol in that
1291archive is needed to resolve an undefined symbol referred to by an
1292object in an archive that appears later on the command line, the linker
1293would not be able to resolve that reference. By grouping the archives,
1294they all be searched repeatedly until all possible references are
1295resolved.
1296
1297Using this option has a significant performance cost. It is best to use
1298it only when there are unavoidable circular references between two or
1299more archives.
1300
69da35b5
NC
1301@kindex --accept-unknown-input-arch
1302@kindex --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1303@item --accept-unknown-input-arch
1304@itemx --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1305Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
2ca22b03 1306recognised. The assumption is that the user knows what they are doing
69da35b5
NC
1307and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files. This was
1308the default behaviour of the linker, before release 2.14. The default
1309behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to reject such input files, and
1310so the @samp{--accept-unknown-input-arch} option has been added to
1311restore the old behaviour.
2ca22b03 1312
4a43e768
AM
1313@kindex --as-needed
1314@kindex --no-as-needed
1315@item --as-needed
1316@itemx --no-as-needed
1317This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries mentioned
ddbb8a31 1318on the command line after the @option{--as-needed} option. Normally
4a43e768
AM
1319the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library mentioned
1320on the command line, regardless of whether the library is actually
ddbb8a31 1321needed or not. @option{--as-needed} causes a DT_NEEDED tag to only be
ffa9430d
AM
1322emitted for a library that @emph{at that point in the link} satisfies a
1323non-weak undefined symbol reference from a regular object file or, if
1240be6b
AM
1324the library is not found in the DT_NEEDED lists of other needed libraries, a
1325non-weak undefined symbol reference from another needed dynamic library.
ffa9430d
AM
1326Object files or libraries appearing on the command line @emph{after}
1327the library in question do not affect whether the library is seen as
1328needed. This is similar to the rules for extraction of object files
1329from archives. @option{--no-as-needed} restores the default behaviour.
4a43e768 1330
e56f61be
L
1331@kindex --add-needed
1332@kindex --no-add-needed
1333@item --add-needed
1334@itemx --no-add-needed
ddbb8a31
NC
1335These two options have been deprecated because of the similarity of
1336their names to the @option{--as-needed} and @option{--no-as-needed}
1337options. They have been replaced by @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1338and @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
e56f61be 1339
252b5132
RH
1340@kindex -assert @var{keyword}
1341@item -assert @var{keyword}
1342This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
1343
1344@kindex -Bdynamic
1345@kindex -dy
1346@kindex -call_shared
1347@item -Bdynamic
1348@itemx -dy
1349@itemx -call_shared
1350Link against dynamic libraries. This is only meaningful on platforms
1351for which shared libraries are supported. This option is normally the
1352default on such platforms. The different variants of this option are
1353for compatibility with various systems. You may use this option
1354multiple times on the command line: it affects library searching for
da8bce14 1355@option{-l} options which follow it.
252b5132 1356
a1ab1d2a
UD
1357@kindex -Bgroup
1358@item -Bgroup
1359Set the @code{DF_1_GROUP} flag in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} entry in the dynamic
1360section. This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
1361object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
560e09e9
NC
1362@option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all} is implied. This option is
1363only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
a1ab1d2a 1364
252b5132
RH
1365@kindex -Bstatic
1366@kindex -dn
1367@kindex -non_shared
1368@kindex -static
a1ab1d2a 1369@item -Bstatic
252b5132
RH
1370@itemx -dn
1371@itemx -non_shared
1372@itemx -static
1373Do not link against shared libraries. This is only meaningful on
1374platforms for which shared libraries are supported. The different
1375variants of this option are for compatibility with various systems. You
1376may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
560e09e9 1377library searching for @option{-l} options which follow it. This
e9156f74
NC
1378option also implies @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all}. This
1379option can be used with @option{-shared}. Doing so means that a
1380shared library is being created but that all of the library's external
1381references must be resolved by pulling in entries from static
ece2d90e 1382libraries.
252b5132
RH
1383
1384@kindex -Bsymbolic
1385@item -Bsymbolic
1386When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols to the
1387definition within the shared library, if any. Normally, it is possible
1388for a program linked against a shared library to override the definition
e20365c5
L
1389within the shared library. This option can also be used with the
1390@option{--export-dynamic} option, when creating a position independent
1391executable, to bind references to global symbols to the definition within
1392the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which
1393support shared libraries and position independent executables.
252b5132 1394
40b36307
L
1395@kindex -Bsymbolic-functions
1396@item -Bsymbolic-functions
1397When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
c0065db7 1398symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any.
e20365c5
L
1399This option can also be used with the @option{--export-dynamic} option,
1400when creating a position independent executable, to bind references
1401to global function symbols to the definition within the executable.
40b36307 1402This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
e20365c5 1403libraries and position independent executables.
40b36307 1404
55255dae
L
1405@kindex --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1406@item --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1407Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker. This is
1408typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
1409global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the definition
1410within the shared library, or creating dynamically linked executables
1411to specify a list of symbols which should be added to the symbol table
1412in the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms
1413which support shared libraries.
1414
1415The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node without
1416scope and node name. See @ref{VERSION} for more information.
1417
40b36307
L
1418@kindex --dynamic-list-data
1419@item --dynamic-list-data
1420Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
1421
1422@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1423@item --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1424Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete. It
1425is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
1426
0b8a70d9
L
1427@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1428@item --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1429Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type identification.
1430
252b5132
RH
1431@kindex --check-sections
1432@kindex --no-check-sections
1433@item --check-sections
308b1ffd 1434@itemx --no-check-sections
252b5132 1435Asks the linker @emph{not} to check section addresses after they have
7d816a17 1436been assigned to see if there are any overlaps. Normally the linker will
252b5132
RH
1437perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it will produce
1438suitable error messages. The linker does know about, and does make
1439allowances for sections in overlays. The default behaviour can be
a05a5b64 1440restored by using the command-line switch @option{--check-sections}.
02b0b1aa
NS
1441Section overlap is not usually checked for relocatable links. You can
1442force checking in that case by using the @option{--check-sections}
1443option.
252b5132 1444
ddbb8a31
NC
1445@kindex --copy-dt-needed-entries
1446@kindex --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1447@item --copy-dt-needed-entries
1448@itemx --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
9d5777a3 1449This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries referred to
ddbb8a31 1450by DT_NEEDED tags @emph{inside} ELF dynamic libraries mentioned on the
08efffb8 1451command line. Normally the linker won't add a DT_NEEDED tag to the
ddbb8a31 1452output binary for each library mentioned in a DT_NEEDED tag in an
08efffb8 1453input dynamic library. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
ddbb8a31 1454specified on the command line however any dynamic libraries that
08efffb8
MM
1455follow it will have their DT_NEEDED entries added. The default
1456behaviour can be restored with @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
ddbb8a31
NC
1457
1458This option also has an effect on the resolution of symbols in dynamic
08efffb8
MM
1459libraries. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries} dynamic libraries
1460mentioned on the command line will be recursively searched, following
1461their DT_NEEDED tags to other libraries, in order to resolve symbols
1462required by the output binary. With the default setting however
1463the searching of dynamic libraries that follow it will stop with the
1464dynamic library itself. No DT_NEEDED links will be traversed to resolve
ddbb8a31
NC
1465symbols.
1466
252b5132
RH
1467@cindex cross reference table
1468@kindex --cref
1469@item --cref
1470Output a cross reference table. If a linker map file is being
1471generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
1472Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
1473
1474The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
1475easily processed by a script if necessary. The symbols are printed out,
1476sorted by name. For each symbol, a list of file names is given. If the
1477symbol is defined, the first file listed is the location of the
049c1c8e
NC
1478definition. If the symbol is defined as a common value then any files
1479where this happens appear next. Finally any files that reference the
1480symbol are listed.
252b5132 1481
4818e05f
AM
1482@cindex common allocation
1483@kindex --no-define-common
1484@item --no-define-common
1485This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
1486The script command @code{INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
1487@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1488
1489The @samp{--no-define-common} option allows decoupling
1490the decision to assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice
1491of the output file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type
1492forces assigning addresses to Common symbols.
1493Using @samp{--no-define-common} allows Common symbols that are referenced
1494from a shared library to be assigned addresses only in the main program.
1495This eliminates the unused duplicate space in the shared library,
1496and also prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
1497duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized search
1498paths for runtime symbol resolution.
1499
7bdf4127
AB
1500@cindex group allocation in linker script
1501@cindex section groups
1502@cindex COMDAT
1503@kindex --force-group-allocation
1504@item --force-group-allocation
1505This option causes the linker to place section group members like
1506normal input sections, and to delete the section groups. This is the
1507default behaviour for a final link but this option can be used to
1508change the behaviour of a relocatable link (@samp{-r}). The script
1509command @code{FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION} has the same
1510effect. @xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1511
252b5132 1512@cindex symbols, from command line
2509a395
SL
1513@kindex --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{exp}
1514@item --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{expression}
252b5132
RH
1515Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
1516address given by @var{expression}. You may use this option as many
1517times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line. A
1518limited form of arithmetic is supported for the @var{expression} in this
1519context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of an existing
1520symbol, or use @code{+} and @code{-} to add or subtract hexadecimal
1521constants or symbols. If you need more elaborate expressions, consider
66bc8739
AM
1522using the linker command language from a script (@pxref{Assignments}).
1523@emph{Note:} there should be no white space between @var{symbol}, the
1524equals sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{expression}.
252b5132
RH
1525
1526@cindex demangling, from command line
28c309a2 1527@kindex --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132 1528@kindex --no-demangle
28c309a2 1529@item --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132
RH
1530@itemx --no-demangle
1531These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error messages
1532and other output. When the linker is told to demangle, it tries to
1533present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips leading
1534underscores if they are used by the object file format, and converts C++
a1ab1d2a
UD
1535mangled symbol names into user readable names. Different compilers have
1536different mangling styles. The optional demangling style argument can be used
1537to choose an appropriate demangling style for your compiler. The linker will
28c309a2
NC
1538demangle by default unless the environment variable @samp{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}
1539is set. These options may be used to override the default.
252b5132
RH
1540
1541@cindex dynamic linker, from command line
506eee22 1542@kindex -I@var{file}
2509a395
SL
1543@kindex --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1544@item -I@var{file}
1545@itemx --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
252b5132
RH
1546Set the name of the dynamic linker. This is only meaningful when
1547generating dynamically linked ELF executables. The default dynamic
1548linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what you are
1549doing.
1550
9b8b325a
RF
1551@kindex --no-dynamic-linker
1552@item --no-dynamic-linker
1553When producing an executable file, omit the request for a dynamic
1554linker to be used at load-time. This is only meaningful for ELF
1555executables that contain dynamic relocations, and usually requires
1556entry point code that is capable of processing these relocations.
1557
a70f34c0
NC
1558@kindex --embedded-relocs
1559@item --embedded-relocs
1560This option is similar to the @option{--emit-relocs} option except
1561that the relocs are stored in a target specific section. This option
1562is only supported by the @samp{BFIN}, @samp{CR16} and @emph{M68K}
1563targets.
1564
3f0a5f17
ME
1565@kindex --disable-multiple-abs-defs
1566@item --disable-multiple-abs-defs
1567Do not allow multiple definitions with symbols included
1568in filename invoked by -R or --just-symbols
1569
7ce691ae 1570@kindex --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd 1571@kindex --no-fatal-warnings
7ce691ae 1572@item --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd
NC
1573@itemx --no-fatal-warnings
1574Treat all warnings as errors. The default behaviour can be restored
1575with the option @option{--no-fatal-warnings}.
7ce691ae 1576
252b5132
RH
1577@kindex --force-exe-suffix
1578@item --force-exe-suffix
1579Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
1580
1581If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
1582@code{.exe} or @code{.dll} suffix, this option forces the linker to copy
1583the output file to one of the same name with a @code{.exe} suffix. This
1584option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a Microsoft
1585Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run an image unless
1586it ends in a @code{.exe} suffix.
1587
1588@kindex --gc-sections
1589@kindex --no-gc-sections
1590@cindex garbage collection
c17d87de
NC
1591@item --gc-sections
1592@itemx --no-gc-sections
252b5132 1593Enable garbage collection of unused input sections. It is ignored on
ac69cbc6 1594targets that do not support this option. The default behaviour (of not
b3549761 1595performing this garbage collection) can be restored by specifying
0f088b2a
KT
1596@samp{--no-gc-sections} on the command line. Note that garbage
1597collection for COFF and PE format targets is supported, but the
1598implementation is currently considered to be experimental.
252b5132 1599
d5465ba2
AM
1600@samp{--gc-sections} decides which input sections are used by
1601examining symbols and relocations. The section containing the entry
1602symbol and all sections containing symbols undefined on the
1603command-line will be kept, as will sections containing symbols
1604referenced by dynamic objects. Note that when building shared
1605libraries, the linker must assume that any visible symbol is
1606referenced. Once this initial set of sections has been determined,
1607the linker recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
1608relocations. See @samp{--entry} and @samp{--undefined}.
1609
ac69cbc6 1610This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with option
9d5777a3 1611@samp{-r}). In this case the root of symbols kept must be explicitly
ac69cbc6
TG
1612specified either by an @samp{--entry} or @samp{--undefined} option or by
1613a @code{ENTRY} command in the linker script.
1614
c17d87de
NC
1615@kindex --print-gc-sections
1616@kindex --no-print-gc-sections
1617@cindex garbage collection
1618@item --print-gc-sections
1619@itemx --no-print-gc-sections
1620List all sections removed by garbage collection. The listing is
1621printed on stderr. This option is only effective if garbage
1622collection has been enabled via the @samp{--gc-sections}) option. The
1623default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed) can
1624be restored by specifying @samp{--no-print-gc-sections} on the command
1625line.
1626
22185505 1627@kindex --gc-keep-exported
1628@cindex garbage collection
1629@item --gc-keep-exported
1630When @samp{--gc-sections} is enabled, this option prevents garbage
1631collection of unused input sections that contain global symbols having
1632default or protected visibility. This option is intended to be used for
1633executables where unreferenced sections would otherwise be garbage
1634collected regardless of the external visibility of contained symbols.
1635Note that this option has no effect when linking shared objects since
1636it is already the default behaviour. This option is only supported for
1637ELF format targets.
1638
30824704
RM
1639@kindex --print-output-format
1640@cindex output format
1641@item --print-output-format
1642Print the name of the default output format (perhaps influenced by
1643other command-line options). This is the string that would appear
1644in an @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} linker script command (@pxref{File Commands}).
1645
3604cb1f
TG
1646@kindex --print-memory-usage
1647@cindex memory usage
1648@item --print-memory-usage
1649Print used size, total size and used size of memory regions created with
1650the @ref{MEMORY} command. This is useful on embedded targets to have a
1651quick view of amount of free memory. The format of the output has one
1652headline and one line per region. It is both human readable and easily
1653parsable by tools. Here is an example of an output:
1654
1655@smallexample
1656Memory region Used Size Region Size %age Used
1657 ROM: 256 KB 1 MB 25.00%
1658 RAM: 32 B 2 GB 0.00%
1659@end smallexample
1660
252b5132
RH
1661@cindex help
1662@cindex usage
1663@kindex --help
1664@item --help
1665Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output and exit.
1666
ea20a7da
CC
1667@kindex --target-help
1668@item --target-help
1669Print a summary of all target specific options on the standard output and exit.
1670
2509a395
SL
1671@kindex -Map=@var{mapfile}
1672@item -Map=@var{mapfile}
252b5132 1673Print a link map to the file @var{mapfile}. See the description of the
560e09e9 1674@option{-M} option, above.
252b5132
RH
1675
1676@cindex memory usage
1677@kindex --no-keep-memory
1678@item --no-keep-memory
ff5dcc92
SC
1679@command{ld} normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
1680symbol tables of input files in memory. This option tells @command{ld} to
252b5132 1681instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables as
ff5dcc92 1682necessary. This may be required if @command{ld} runs out of memory space
252b5132
RH
1683while linking a large executable.
1684
1685@kindex --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1686@kindex -z defs
97a232d7 1687@kindex -z undefs
252b5132 1688@item --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1689@itemx -z defs
560e09e9
NC
1690Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1691is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1692The switch @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} controls the
1693behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
ece2d90e 1694libraries being linked in.
252b5132 1695
97a232d7
NC
1696The effects of this option can be reverted by using @code{-z undefs}.
1697
aa713662
L
1698@kindex --allow-multiple-definition
1699@kindex -z muldefs
1700@item --allow-multiple-definition
1701@itemx -z muldefs
1702Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
1703report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and the
1704first definition will be used.
1705
b79e8c78 1706@kindex --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1707@kindex --no-allow-shlib-undefined
b79e8c78 1708@item --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1709@itemx --no-allow-shlib-undefined
903249d7 1710Allows or disallows undefined symbols in shared libraries.
560e09e9
NC
1711This switch is similar to @option{--no-undefined} except that it
1712determines the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a
1713shared library rather than a regular object file. It does not affect
1714how undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
1715
903249d7
NC
1716The default behaviour is to report errors for any undefined symbols
1717referenced in shared libraries if the linker is being used to create
1718an executable, but to allow them if the linker is being used to create
1719a shared library.
1720
1721The reasons for allowing undefined symbol references in shared
1722libraries specified at link time are that:
1723
1724@itemize @bullet
1725@item
1726A shared library specified at link time may not be the same as the one
1727that is available at load time, so the symbol might actually be
1728resolvable at load time.
1729@item
1730There are some operating systems, eg BeOS and HPPA, where undefined
1731symbols in shared libraries are normal.
1732
1733The BeOS kernel for example patches shared libraries at load time to
1734select whichever function is most appropriate for the current
1735architecture. This is used, for example, to dynamically select an
1736appropriate memset function.
1737@end itemize
b79e8c78 1738
31941635
L
1739@kindex --no-undefined-version
1740@item --no-undefined-version
1741Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will ignore
1742it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version and a fatal error
1743will be issued instead.
1744
3e3b46e5
PB
1745@kindex --default-symver
1746@item --default-symver
1747Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
fc0e6df6
PB
1748exported symbols.
1749
1750@kindex --default-imported-symver
1751@item --default-imported-symver
1752Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1753imported symbols.
3e3b46e5 1754
252b5132
RH
1755@kindex --no-warn-mismatch
1756@item --no-warn-mismatch
ff5dcc92 1757Normally @command{ld} will give an error if you try to link together input
252b5132
RH
1758files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they have
1759been compiled for different processors or for different endiannesses.
ff5dcc92 1760This option tells @command{ld} that it should silently permit such possible
252b5132
RH
1761errors. This option should only be used with care, in cases when you
1762have taken some special action that ensures that the linker errors are
1763inappropriate.
1764
fe7929ce
AM
1765@kindex --no-warn-search-mismatch
1766@item --no-warn-search-mismatch
1767Normally @command{ld} will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
1768library during a library search. This option silences the warning.
1769
252b5132
RH
1770@kindex --no-whole-archive
1771@item --no-whole-archive
ff5dcc92 1772Turn off the effect of the @option{--whole-archive} option for subsequent
252b5132
RH
1773archive files.
1774
1775@cindex output file after errors
1776@kindex --noinhibit-exec
1777@item --noinhibit-exec
1778Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
1779Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it encounters
1780errors during the link process; it exits without writing an output file
1781when it issues any error whatsoever.
1782
0a9c1c8e
CD
1783@kindex -nostdlib
1784@item -nostdlib
1785Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
1786command line. Library directories specified in linker scripts
1787(including linker scripts specified on the command line) are ignored.
1788
252b5132 1789@ifclear SingleFormat
2509a395
SL
1790@kindex --oformat=@var{output-format}
1791@item --oformat=@var{output-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
1792@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
1793file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 1794@samp{--oformat} option to specify the binary format for the output
ff5dcc92
SC
1795object file. Even when @command{ld} is configured to support alternative
1796object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
1797should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
1798usual format on each machine. @var{output-format} is a text string, the
1799name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries. (You can
1800list the available binary formats with @samp{objdump -i}.) The script
1801command @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} can also specify the output format, but
1802this option overrides it. @xref{BFD}.
1803@end ifclear
1804
76359541
TP
1805@kindex --out-implib
1806@item --out-implib @var{file}
1807Create an import library in @var{file} corresponding to the executable
1808the linker is generating (eg. a DLL or ELF program). This import
1809library (which should be called @code{*.dll.a} or @code{*.a} for DLLs)
1810may be used to link clients against the generated executable; this
1811behaviour makes it possible to skip a separate import library creation
1812step (eg. @code{dlltool} for DLLs). This option is only available for
1813the i386 PE and ELF targetted ports of the linker.
1814
36af4a4e
JJ
1815@kindex -pie
1816@kindex --pic-executable
1817@item -pie
1818@itemx --pic-executable
1819@cindex position independent executables
1820Create a position independent executable. This is currently only supported on
1821ELF platforms. Position independent executables are similar to shared
1822libraries in that they are relocated by the dynamic linker to the virtual
7e7d5768 1823address the OS chooses for them (which can vary between invocations). Like
36af4a4e
JJ
1824normal dynamically linked executables they can be executed and symbols
1825defined in the executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
1826
252b5132
RH
1827@kindex -qmagic
1828@item -qmagic
1829This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
1830
1831@kindex -Qy
1832@item -Qy
1833This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
1834
1835@kindex --relax
1836@cindex synthesizing linker
1837@cindex relaxing addressing modes
28d5f677 1838@cindex --no-relax
252b5132 1839@item --relax
28d5f677 1840@itemx --no-relax
a1ab1d2a 1841An option with machine dependent effects.
252b5132
RH
1842@ifset GENERIC
1843This option is only supported on a few targets.
1844@end ifset
1845@ifset H8300
ff5dcc92 1846@xref{H8/300,,@command{ld} and the H8/300}.
252b5132 1847@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
1848@ifset XTENSA
1849@xref{Xtensa,, @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors}.
1850@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
1851@ifset M68HC11
1852@xref{M68HC11/68HC12,,@command{ld} and the 68HC11 and 68HC12}.
1853@end ifset
78058a5e
SL
1854@ifset NIOSII
1855@xref{Nios II,,@command{ld} and the Altera Nios II}.
1856@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
1857@ifset POWERPC
1858@xref{PowerPC ELF32,,@command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support}.
1859@end ifset
252b5132 1860
28d5f677
NC
1861On some platforms the @samp{--relax} option performs target specific,
1862global optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves
1863addressing in the program, such as relaxing address modes,
1864synthesizing new instructions, selecting shorter version of current
11e7fd74 1865instructions, and combining constant values.
252b5132
RH
1866
1867On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make symbolic
1868debugging of the resulting executable impossible.
1869@ifset GENERIC
28d5f677
NC
1870This is known to be the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300
1871family of processors.
252b5132
RH
1872@end ifset
1873
1874@ifset GENERIC
1875On platforms where this is not supported, @samp{--relax} is accepted,
1876but ignored.
1877@end ifset
1878
28d5f677
NC
1879On platforms where @samp{--relax} is accepted the option
1880@samp{--no-relax} can be used to disable the feature.
1881
252b5132
RH
1882@cindex retaining specified symbols
1883@cindex stripping all but some symbols
1884@cindex symbols, retaining selectively
2509a395
SL
1885@kindex --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1886@item --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
252b5132
RH
1887Retain @emph{only} the symbols listed in the file @var{filename},
1888discarding all others. @var{filename} is simply a flat file, with one
1889symbol name per line. This option is especially useful in environments
1890@ifset GENERIC
1891(such as VxWorks)
1892@end ifset
1893where a large global symbol table is accumulated gradually, to conserve
1894run-time memory.
1895
1896@samp{--retain-symbols-file} does @emph{not} discard undefined symbols,
1897or symbols needed for relocations.
1898
1899You may only specify @samp{--retain-symbols-file} once in the command
1900line. It overrides @samp{-s} and @samp{-S}.
1901
1902@ifset GENERIC
2509a395 1903@item -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1904@cindex runtime library search path
2509a395 1905@kindex -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1906Add a directory to the runtime library search path. This is used when
ff5dcc92 1907linking an ELF executable with shared objects. All @option{-rpath}
252b5132 1908arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which uses
ff5dcc92 1909them to locate shared objects at runtime. The @option{-rpath} option is
252b5132
RH
1910also used when locating shared objects which are needed by shared
1911objects explicitly included in the link; see the description of the
ff5dcc92 1912@option{-rpath-link} option. If @option{-rpath} is not used when linking an
252b5132
RH
1913ELF executable, the contents of the environment variable
1914@code{LD_RUN_PATH} will be used if it is defined.
1915
ff5dcc92 1916The @option{-rpath} option may also be used on SunOS. By default, on
d8506323 1917SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search path out of all the
ff5dcc92
SC
1918@option{-L} options it is given. If a @option{-rpath} option is used, the
1919runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the @option{-rpath}
1920options, ignoring the @option{-L} options. This can be useful when using
1921gcc, which adds many @option{-L} options which may be on NFS mounted
b45619c0 1922file systems.
252b5132 1923
ff5dcc92 1924For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 1925followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 1926the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
1927@end ifset
1928
1929@ifset GENERIC
1930@cindex link-time runtime library search path
2509a395
SL
1931@kindex -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1932@item -rpath-link=@var{dir}
252b5132
RH
1933When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another. This
1934happens when an @code{ld -shared} link includes a shared library as one
1935of the input files.
1936
1937When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a non-shared,
1938non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to locate the required
1939shared library and include it in the link, if it is not included
ff5dcc92 1940explicitly. In such a case, the @option{-rpath-link} option
252b5132 1941specifies the first set of directories to search. The
ff5dcc92 1942@option{-rpath-link} option may specify a sequence of directory names
252b5132
RH
1943either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
1944appearing multiple times.
1945
e680a6b6
NC
1946The tokens @var{$ORIGIN} and @var{$LIB} can appear in these search
1947directories. They will be replaced by the full path to the directory
1948containing the program or shared object in the case of @var{$ORIGIN}
1949and either @samp{lib} - for 32-bit binaries - or @samp{lib64} - for
195064-bit binaries - in the case of @var{$LIB}.
1951
1952The alternative form of these tokens - @var{$@{ORIGIN@}} and
1953@var{$@{LIB@}} can also be used. The token @var{$PLATFORM} is not
1954supported.
1955
28c309a2
NC
1956This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search path
1957that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In such a case it
1958is possible to use unintentionally a different search path than the
1959runtime linker would do.
1960
252b5132 1961The linker uses the following search paths to locate required shared
ece2d90e 1962libraries:
252b5132
RH
1963@enumerate
1964@item
ff5dcc92 1965Any directories specified by @option{-rpath-link} options.
252b5132 1966@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1967Any directories specified by @option{-rpath} options. The difference
1968between @option{-rpath} and @option{-rpath-link} is that directories
1969specified by @option{-rpath} options are included in the executable and
1970used at runtime, whereas the @option{-rpath-link} option is only effective
ece2d90e
NC
1971at link time. Searching @option{-rpath} in this way is only supported
1972by native linkers and cross linkers which have been configured with
1973the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
252b5132 1974@item
e2a83dd0
NC
1975On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the @option{-rpath} and
1976@option{-rpath-link} options were not used, search the contents of the
1977environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH}.
252b5132 1978@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1979On SunOS, if the @option{-rpath} option was not used, search any
1980directories specified using @option{-L} options.
252b5132 1981@item
a1b8d843 1982For a native linker, search the contents of the environment
e2a83dd0 1983variable @code{LD_LIBRARY_PATH}.
252b5132 1984@item
ec4eb78a
L
1985For a native ELF linker, the directories in @code{DT_RUNPATH} or
1986@code{DT_RPATH} of a shared library are searched for shared
1987libraries needed by it. The @code{DT_RPATH} entries are ignored if
1988@code{DT_RUNPATH} entries exist.
1989@item
252b5132
RH
1990The default directories, normally @file{/lib} and @file{/usr/lib}.
1991@item
1992For a native linker on an ELF system, if the file @file{/etc/ld.so.conf}
1993exists, the list of directories found in that file.
1994@end enumerate
1995
1996If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue a
1997warning and continue with the link.
1998@end ifset
1999
2000@kindex -shared
2001@kindex -Bshareable
2002@item -shared
2003@itemx -Bshareable
2004@cindex shared libraries
2005Create a shared library. This is currently only supported on ELF, XCOFF
2006and SunOS platforms. On SunOS, the linker will automatically create a
ff5dcc92 2007shared library if the @option{-e} option is not used and there are
252b5132
RH
2008undefined symbols in the link.
2009
252b5132 2010@kindex --sort-common
2509a395
SL
2011@item --sort-common
2012@itemx --sort-common=ascending
2013@itemx --sort-common=descending
de7dd2bd
NC
2014This option tells @command{ld} to sort the common symbols by alignment in
2015ascending or descending order when it places them in the appropriate output
2016sections. The symbol alignments considered are sixteen-byte or larger,
2017eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and one-byte. This is to prevent gaps
2018between symbols due to alignment constraints. If no sorting order is
2019specified, then descending order is assumed.
252b5132 2020
2509a395
SL
2021@kindex --sort-section=name
2022@item --sort-section=name
bcaa7b3e
L
2023This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_NAME} to all wildcard section
2024patterns in the linker script.
2025
2509a395
SL
2026@kindex --sort-section=alignment
2027@item --sort-section=alignment
bcaa7b3e
L
2028This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} to all wildcard section
2029patterns in the linker script.
2030
a70f34c0
NC
2031@kindex --spare-dynamic-tags
2032@item --spare-dynamic-tags=@var{count}
2033This option specifies the number of empty slots to leave in the
2034.dynamic section of ELF shared objects. Empty slots may be needed by
2035post processing tools, such as the prelinker. The default is 5.
2036
252b5132 2037@kindex --split-by-file
2509a395 2038@item --split-by-file[=@var{size}]
ff5dcc92 2039Similar to @option{--split-by-reloc} but creates a new output section for
a854a4a7
AM
2040each input file when @var{size} is reached. @var{size} defaults to a
2041size of 1 if not given.
252b5132
RH
2042
2043@kindex --split-by-reloc
2509a395 2044@item --split-by-reloc[=@var{count}]
a854a4a7 2045Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no single
252b5132 2046output section in the file contains more than @var{count} relocations.
a854a4a7 2047This is useful when generating huge relocatable files for downloading into
252b5132
RH
2048certain real time kernels with the COFF object file format; since COFF
2049cannot represent more than 65535 relocations in a single section. Note
2050that this will fail to work with object file formats which do not
2051support arbitrary sections. The linker will not split up individual
2052input sections for redistribution, so if a single input section contains
2053more than @var{count} relocations one output section will contain that
a854a4a7 2054many relocations. @var{count} defaults to a value of 32768.
252b5132
RH
2055
2056@kindex --stats
2057@item --stats
2058Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker, such
2059as execution time and memory usage.
2060
2509a395 2061@kindex --sysroot=@var{directory}
e2243057
RS
2062@item --sysroot=@var{directory}
2063Use @var{directory} as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
2064configure-time default. This option is only supported by linkers
2065that were configured using @option{--with-sysroot}.
2066
a70f34c0
NC
2067@kindex --task-link
2068@item --task-link
2069This is used by COFF/PE based targets to create a task-linked object
2070file where all of the global symbols have been converted to statics.
2071
252b5132
RH
2072@kindex --traditional-format
2073@cindex traditional format
2074@item --traditional-format
ff5dcc92
SC
2075For some targets, the output of @command{ld} is different in some ways from
2076the output of some existing linker. This switch requests @command{ld} to
252b5132
RH
2077use the traditional format instead.
2078
2079@cindex dbx
ff5dcc92 2080For example, on SunOS, @command{ld} combines duplicate entries in the
252b5132
RH
2081symbol string table. This can reduce the size of an output file with
2082full debugging information by over 30 percent. Unfortunately, the SunOS
2083@code{dbx} program can not read the resulting program (@code{gdb} has no
ff5dcc92 2084trouble). The @samp{--traditional-format} switch tells @command{ld} to not
252b5132
RH
2085combine duplicate entries.
2086
2509a395
SL
2087@kindex --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
2088@item --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
176355da
NC
2089Locate a section in the output file at the absolute
2090address given by @var{org}. You may use this option as many
2091times as necessary to locate multiple sections in the command
2092line.
2093@var{org} must be a single hexadecimal integer;
2094for compatibility with other linkers, you may omit the leading
2095@samp{0x} usually associated with hexadecimal values. @emph{Note:} there
2096should be no white space between @var{sectionname}, the equals
2097sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{org}.
2098
2509a395
SL
2099@kindex -Tbss=@var{org}
2100@kindex -Tdata=@var{org}
2101@kindex -Ttext=@var{org}
252b5132 2102@cindex segment origins, cmd line
2509a395
SL
2103@item -Tbss=@var{org}
2104@itemx -Tdata=@var{org}
2105@itemx -Ttext=@var{org}
2106Same as @option{--section-start}, with @code{.bss}, @code{.data} or
a6e02871 2107@code{.text} as the @var{sectionname}.
252b5132 2108
2509a395
SL
2109@kindex -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
2110@item -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
258795f5 2111@cindex text segment origin, cmd line
2b8c06a3
L
2112When creating an ELF executable, it will set the address of the first
2113byte of the text segment.
258795f5 2114
9d5777a3
RM
2115@kindex -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
2116@item -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
2117@cindex rodata segment origin, cmd line
2118When creating an ELF executable or shared object for a target where
2119the read-only data is in its own segment separate from the executable
2120text, it will set the address of the first byte of the read-only data segment.
2121
0d705e9f
AM
2122@kindex -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
2123@item -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
2124@cindex ldata segment origin, cmd line
2125When creating an ELF executable or shared object for x86-64 medium memory
2126model, it will set the address of the first byte of the ldata segment.
2127
560e09e9
NC
2128@kindex --unresolved-symbols
2129@item --unresolved-symbols=@var{method}
2130Determine how to handle unresolved symbols. There are four possible
2131values for @samp{method}:
2132
2133@table @samp
2134@item ignore-all
da8bce14 2135Do not report any unresolved symbols.
560e09e9
NC
2136
2137@item report-all
da8bce14 2138Report all unresolved symbols. This is the default.
560e09e9
NC
2139
2140@item ignore-in-object-files
2141Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared libraries, but
2142ignore them if they come from regular object files.
2143
2144@item ignore-in-shared-libs
2145Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object files, but
2146ignore them if they come from shared libraries. This can be useful
2147when creating a dynamic binary and it is known that all the shared
2148libraries that it should be referencing are included on the linker's
2149command line.
2150@end table
2151
2152The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be controlled
2153by the @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} option.
2154
2155Normally the linker will generate an error message for each reported
2156unresolved symbol but the option @option{--warn-unresolved-symbols}
2157can change this to a warning.
2158
1715a13c
L
2159@kindex --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
2160@cindex verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
252b5132 2161@item --dll-verbose
1715a13c 2162@itemx --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
ff5dcc92 2163Display the version number for @command{ld} and list the linker emulations
252b5132 2164supported. Display which input files can and cannot be opened. Display
1715a13c
L
2165the linker script being used by the linker. If the optional @var{NUMBER}
2166argument > 1, plugin symbol status will also be displayed.
252b5132
RH
2167
2168@kindex --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
2169@cindex version script, symbol versions
2509a395 2170@item --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
252b5132
RH
2171Specify the name of a version script to the linker. This is typically
2172used when creating shared libraries to specify additional information
36f63dca 2173about the version hierarchy for the library being created. This option
09e2aba4
DK
2174is only fully supported on ELF platforms which support shared libraries;
2175see @ref{VERSION}. It is partially supported on PE platforms, which can
2176use version scripts to filter symbol visibility in auto-export mode: any
2177symbols marked @samp{local} in the version script will not be exported.
2178@xref{WIN32}.
252b5132 2179
7ce691ae 2180@kindex --warn-common
252b5132
RH
2181@cindex warnings, on combining symbols
2182@cindex combining symbols, warnings on
2183@item --warn-common
2184Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol or with
11e7fd74 2185a symbol definition. Unix linkers allow this somewhat sloppy practice,
252b5132
RH
2186but linkers on some other operating systems do not. This option allows
2187you to find potential problems from combining global symbols.
11e7fd74 2188Unfortunately, some C libraries use this practice, so you may get some
252b5132
RH
2189warnings about symbols in the libraries as well as in your programs.
2190
2191There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C examples:
2192
2193@table @samp
2194@item int i = 1;
2195A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of the output
2196file.
2197
2198@item extern int i;
2199An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.
2200There must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
2201variable somewhere.
2202
2203@item int i;
2204A common symbol. If there are only (one or more) common symbols for a
2205variable, it goes in the uninitialized data area of the output file.
2206The linker merges multiple common symbols for the same variable into a
2207single symbol. If they are of different sizes, it picks the largest
2208size. The linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
2209a definition of the same variable.
2210@end table
2211
2212The @samp{--warn-common} option can produce five kinds of warnings.
2213Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the symbol
2214just encountered, and the second describes the previous symbol
2215encountered with the same name. One or both of the two symbols will be
2216a common symbol.
2217
2218@enumerate
2219@item
2220Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is already a
2221definition for the symbol.
2222@smallexample
2223@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2224 overridden by definition
2225@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: defined here
2226@end smallexample
2227
2228@item
2229Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later definition for
2230the symbol is encountered. This is the same as the previous case,
2231except that the symbols are encountered in a different order.
2232@smallexample
2233@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: definition of `@var{symbol}'
2234 overriding common
2235@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common is here
2236@end smallexample
2237
2238@item
2239Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common symbol.
2240@smallexample
2241@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: multiple common
2242 of `@var{symbol}'
2243@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: previous common is here
2244@end smallexample
2245
2246@item
2247Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
2248@smallexample
2249@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2250 overridden by larger common
2251@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: larger common is here
2252@end smallexample
2253
2254@item
2255Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common symbol. This is
2256the same as the previous case, except that the symbols are
2257encountered in a different order.
2258@smallexample
2259@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2260 overriding smaller common
2261@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: smaller common is here
2262@end smallexample
2263@end enumerate
2264
2265@kindex --warn-constructors
2266@item --warn-constructors
2267Warn if any global constructors are used. This is only useful for a few
2268object file formats. For formats like COFF or ELF, the linker can not
2269detect the use of global constructors.
2270
2271@kindex --warn-multiple-gp
2272@item --warn-multiple-gp
2273Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output file.
2274This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the Alpha.
2275Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants in a special
2276section. A special register (the global pointer) points into the middle
2277of this section, so that constants can be loaded efficiently via a
2278base-register relative addressing mode. Since the offset in
2279base-register relative mode is fixed and relatively small (e.g., 16
2280bits), this limits the maximum size of the constant pool. Thus, in
2281large programs, it is often necessary to use multiple global pointer
2282values in order to be able to address all possible constants. This
2283option causes a warning to be issued whenever this case occurs.
2284
2285@kindex --warn-once
2286@cindex warnings, on undefined symbols
2287@cindex undefined symbols, warnings on
2288@item --warn-once
2289Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per module
2290which refers to it.
2291
2292@kindex --warn-section-align
2293@cindex warnings, on section alignment
2294@cindex section alignment, warnings on
2295@item --warn-section-align
2296Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
2297alignment. Typically, the alignment will be set by an input section.
2298The address will only be changed if it not explicitly specified; that
2299is, if the @code{SECTIONS} command does not specify a start address for
2300the section (@pxref{SECTIONS}).
2301
8fdd7217
NC
2302@kindex --warn-shared-textrel
2303@item --warn-shared-textrel
ece2d90e 2304Warn if the linker adds a DT_TEXTREL to a shared object.
8fdd7217 2305
a0c402a5
L
2306@kindex --warn-alternate-em
2307@item --warn-alternate-em
2308Warn if an object has alternate ELF machine code.
2309
560e09e9
NC
2310@kindex --warn-unresolved-symbols
2311@item --warn-unresolved-symbols
2312If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the option
2313@option{--unresolved-symbols}) it will normally generate an error.
2314This option makes it generate a warning instead.
2315
2316@kindex --error-unresolved-symbols
2317@item --error-unresolved-symbols
2318This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors when
2319it is reporting unresolved symbols.
2320
252b5132
RH
2321@kindex --whole-archive
2322@cindex including an entire archive
2323@item --whole-archive
2324For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
ff5dcc92 2325@option{--whole-archive} option, include every object file in the archive
252b5132
RH
2326in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required object
2327files. This is normally used to turn an archive file into a shared
2328library, forcing every object to be included in the resulting shared
2329library. This option may be used more than once.
2330
7ec229ce 2331Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
ff5dcc92
SC
2332about this option, so you have to use @option{-Wl,-whole-archive}.
2333Second, don't forget to use @option{-Wl,-no-whole-archive} after your
7ec229ce
DD
2334list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
2335your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
2336
2509a395
SL
2337@kindex --wrap=@var{symbol}
2338@item --wrap=@var{symbol}
252b5132
RH
2339Use a wrapper function for @var{symbol}. Any undefined reference to
2340@var{symbol} will be resolved to @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. Any
2341undefined reference to @code{__real_@var{symbol}} will be resolved to
2342@var{symbol}.
2343
2344This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function. The
2345wrapper function should be called @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. If it
2346wishes to call the system function, it should call
2347@code{__real_@var{symbol}}.
2348
2349Here is a trivial example:
2350
2351@smallexample
2352void *
cc2f008e 2353__wrap_malloc (size_t c)
252b5132 2354@{
cc2f008e 2355 printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
252b5132
RH
2356 return __real_malloc (c);
2357@}
2358@end smallexample
2359
ff5dcc92 2360If you link other code with this file using @option{--wrap malloc}, then
252b5132
RH
2361all calls to @code{malloc} will call the function @code{__wrap_malloc}
2362instead. The call to @code{__real_malloc} in @code{__wrap_malloc} will
2363call the real @code{malloc} function.
2364
2365You may wish to provide a @code{__real_malloc} function as well, so that
ff5dcc92 2366links without the @option{--wrap} option will succeed. If you do this,
252b5132
RH
2367you should not put the definition of @code{__real_malloc} in the same
2368file as @code{__wrap_malloc}; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
2369call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to @code{malloc}.
2370
6aa29e7b 2371@kindex --eh-frame-hdr
29063f8b 2372@kindex --no-eh-frame-hdr
6aa29e7b 2373@item --eh-frame-hdr
29063f8b
NC
2374@itemx --no-eh-frame-hdr
2375Request (@option{--eh-frame-hdr}) or suppress
2376(@option{--no-eh-frame-hdr}) the creation of @code{.eh_frame_hdr}
2377section and ELF @code{PT_GNU_EH_FRAME} segment header.
6aa29e7b 2378
e41b3a13
JJ
2379@kindex --ld-generated-unwind-info
2380@item --no-ld-generated-unwind-info
2381Request creation of @code{.eh_frame} unwind info for linker
2382generated code sections like PLT. This option is on by default
2383if linker generated unwind info is supported.
2384
6c1439be
L
2385@kindex --enable-new-dtags
2386@kindex --disable-new-dtags
2387@item --enable-new-dtags
2388@itemx --disable-new-dtags
2389This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older ELF
2390systems may not understand them. If you specify
b1b00fcc
MF
2391@option{--enable-new-dtags}, the new dynamic tags will be created as needed
2392and older dynamic tags will be omitted.
ff5dcc92 2393If you specify @option{--disable-new-dtags}, no new dynamic tags will be
6c1439be
L
2394created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note that
2395those options are only available for ELF systems.
2396
2d643429 2397@kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
e185dd51 2398@item --hash-size=@var{number}
2d643429
NC
2399Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
2400close to @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of
2401time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
2402increasing the linker's memory requirements. Similarly reducing this
2403value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of speed.
2404
fdc90cb4
JJ
2405@kindex --hash-style=@var{style}
2406@item --hash-style=@var{style}
2407Set the type of linker's hash table(s). @var{style} can be either
2408@code{sysv} for classic ELF @code{.hash} section, @code{gnu} for
2409new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash} section or @code{both} for both
2410the classic ELF @code{.hash} and new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash}
c8455dc9
NC
2411hash tables. The default depends upon how the linker was configured,
2412but for most Linux based systems it will be @code{both}.
fdc90cb4 2413
0ce398f1
L
2414@kindex --compress-debug-sections=none
2415@kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2416@kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2417@kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
2418@item --compress-debug-sections=none
2419@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2420@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2421@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
9af89fba
NC
2422On ELF platforms, these options control how DWARF debug sections are
2423compressed using zlib.
2424
2425@option{--compress-debug-sections=none} doesn't compress DWARF debug
2426sections. @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu} compresses
2427DWARF debug sections and renames them to begin with @samp{.zdebug}
2428instead of @samp{.debug}. @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi}
2429also compresses DWARF debug sections, but rather than renaming them it
2430sets the SHF_COMPRESSED flag in the sections' headers.
2431
2432The @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib} option is an alias for
2433@option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi}.
2434
2435Note that this option overrides any compression in input debug
2436sections, so if a binary is linked with @option{--compress-debug-sections=none}
2437for example, then any compressed debug sections in input files will be
2438uncompressed before they are copied into the output binary.
2439
2440The default compression behaviour varies depending upon the target
2441involved and the configure options used to build the toolchain. The
2442default can be determined by examining the output from the linker's
2443@option{--help} option.
0ce398f1 2444
35835446
JR
2445@kindex --reduce-memory-overheads
2446@item --reduce-memory-overheads
2447This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the expense of
f2a8f148 2448linking speed. This was introduced to select the old O(n^2) algorithm
35835446 2449for link map file generation, rather than the new O(n) algorithm which uses
2d643429
NC
2450about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
2451
4f9c04f7 2452Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size to
2d643429 24531021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the linker's
a85785bc 2454run time. This is not done however if the @option{--hash-size} switch
2d643429
NC
2455has been used.
2456
2457The @option{--reduce-memory-overheads} switch may be also be used to
2458enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
35835446 2459
c0065db7
RM
2460@kindex --build-id
2461@kindex --build-id=@var{style}
2462@item --build-id
2463@itemx --build-id=@var{style}
61e2488c 2464Request the creation of a @code{.note.gnu.build-id} ELF note section
6033bf41 2465or a @code{.buildid} COFF section. The contents of the note are
61e2488c
JT
2466unique bits identifying this linked file. @var{style} can be
2467@code{uuid} to use 128 random bits, @code{sha1} to use a 160-bit
2468@sc{SHA1} hash on the normative parts of the output contents,
2469@code{md5} to use a 128-bit @sc{MD5} hash on the normative parts of
2470the output contents, or @code{0x@var{hexstring}} to use a chosen bit
2471string specified as an even number of hexadecimal digits (@code{-} and
2472@code{:} characters between digit pairs are ignored). If @var{style}
2473is omitted, @code{sha1} is used.
24382dca
RM
2474
2475The @code{md5} and @code{sha1} styles produces an identifier
2476that is always the same in an identical output file, but will be
2477unique among all nonidentical output files. It is not intended
2478to be compared as a checksum for the file's contents. A linked
2479file may be changed later by other tools, but the build ID bit
2480string identifying the original linked file does not change.
c0065db7
RM
2481
2482Passing @code{none} for @var{style} disables the setting from any
2483@code{--build-id} options earlier on the command line.
252b5132
RH
2484@end table
2485
0285c67d
NC
2486@c man end
2487
36f63dca 2488@subsection Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
252b5132 2489
0285c67d
NC
2490@c man begin OPTIONS
2491
ff5dcc92 2492The i386 PE linker supports the @option{-shared} option, which causes
252b5132
RH
2493the output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a
2494normal executable. You should name the output @code{*.dll} when you
2495use this option. In addition, the linker fully supports the standard
2496@code{*.def} files, which may be specified on the linker command line
2497like an object file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports
2498symbols from, to ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal
2499object file).
2500
2501In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
a05a5b64 2502support additional command-line options that are specific to the i386
252b5132
RH
2503PE target. Options that take values may be separated from their
2504values by either a space or an equals sign.
2505
ff5dcc92 2506@table @gcctabopt
252b5132
RH
2507
2508@kindex --add-stdcall-alias
2509@item --add-stdcall-alias
2510If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@@@var{nn}) will be exported
2511as-is and also with the suffix stripped.
bb10df36 2512[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2513
2514@kindex --base-file
2515@item --base-file @var{file}
2516Use @var{file} as the name of a file in which to save the base
2517addresses of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with
2518@file{dlltool}.
bb10df36 2519[This is an i386 PE specific option]
252b5132
RH
2520
2521@kindex --dll
2522@item --dll
2523Create a DLL instead of a regular executable. You may also use
ff5dcc92 2524@option{-shared} or specify a @code{LIBRARY} in a given @code{.def}
252b5132 2525file.
bb10df36 2526[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2527
88183869
DK
2528@kindex --enable-long-section-names
2529@kindex --disable-long-section-names
2530@item --enable-long-section-names
2531@itemx --disable-long-section-names
56e6cf80 2532The PE variants of the COFF object format add an extension that permits
88183869 2533the use of section names longer than eight characters, the normal limit
56e6cf80
NC
2534for COFF. By default, these names are only allowed in object files, as
2535fully-linked executable images do not carry the COFF string table required
88183869
DK
2536to support the longer names. As a GNU extension, it is possible to
2537allow their use in executable images as well, or to (probably pointlessly!)
2538disallow it in object files, by using these two options. Executable images
2539generated with these long section names are slightly non-standard, carrying
2540as they do a string table, and may generate confusing output when examined
9d5777a3
RM
2541with non-GNU PE-aware tools, such as file viewers and dumpers. However,
2542GDB relies on the use of PE long section names to find Dwarf-2 debug
3efd345c
DK
2543information sections in an executable image at runtime, and so if neither
2544option is specified on the command-line, @command{ld} will enable long
2545section names, overriding the default and technically correct behaviour,
2546when it finds the presence of debug information while linking an executable
2547image and not stripping symbols.
88183869
DK
2548[This option is valid for all PE targeted ports of the linker]
2549
252b5132
RH
2550@kindex --enable-stdcall-fixup
2551@kindex --disable-stdcall-fixup
2552@item --enable-stdcall-fixup
2553@itemx --disable-stdcall-fixup
2554If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt to
36f63dca 2555do ``fuzzy linking'' by looking for another defined symbol that differs
252b5132
RH
2556only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall) and will
2557resolve that symbol by linking to the match. For example, the
2558undefined symbol @code{_foo} might be linked to the function
2559@code{_foo@@12}, or the undefined symbol @code{_bar@@16} might be linked
2560to the function @code{_bar}. When the linker does this, it prints a
2561warning, since it normally should have failed to link, but sometimes
2562import libraries generated from third-party dlls may need this feature
ff5dcc92 2563to be usable. If you specify @option{--enable-stdcall-fixup}, this
252b5132 2564feature is fully enabled and warnings are not printed. If you specify
ff5dcc92 2565@option{--disable-stdcall-fixup}, this feature is disabled and such
252b5132 2566mismatches are considered to be errors.
bb10df36 2567[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2568
522f09cd
KT
2569@kindex --leading-underscore
2570@kindex --no-leading-underscore
2571@item --leading-underscore
2572@itemx --no-leading-underscore
2573For most targets default symbol-prefix is an underscore and is defined
2574in target's description. By this option it is possible to
2575disable/enable the default underscore symbol-prefix.
2576
252b5132
RH
2577@cindex DLLs, creating
2578@kindex --export-all-symbols
2579@item --export-all-symbols
2580If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL will
2581be exported by the DLL. Note that this is the default if there
2582otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols. When symbols are
2583explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via function
2584attributes, the default is to not export anything else unless this
2585option is given. Note that the symbols @code{DllMain@@12},
ece2d90e 2586@code{DllEntryPoint@@0}, @code{DllMainCRTStartup@@12}, and
b044cda1 2587@code{impure_ptr} will not be automatically
ece2d90e
NC
2588exported. Also, symbols imported from other DLLs will not be
2589re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the DLL's internal layout
2590such as those beginning with @code{_head_} or ending with
2591@code{_iname}. In addition, no symbols from @code{libgcc},
b044cda1
CW
2592@code{libstd++}, @code{libmingw32}, or @code{crtX.o} will be exported.
2593Symbols whose names begin with @code{__rtti_} or @code{__builtin_} will
2594not be exported, to help with C++ DLLs. Finally, there is an
ece2d90e 2595extensive list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported
b044cda1 2596(obviously, this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).
ece2d90e 2597These cygwin-excludes are: @code{_cygwin_dll_entry@@12},
b044cda1 2598@code{_cygwin_crt0_common@@8}, @code{_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@@12},
ece2d90e 2599@code{_fmode}, @code{_impure_ptr}, @code{cygwin_attach_dll},
b044cda1 2600@code{cygwin_premain0}, @code{cygwin_premain1}, @code{cygwin_premain2},
ece2d90e 2601@code{cygwin_premain3}, and @code{environ}.
bb10df36 2602[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2603
2604@kindex --exclude-symbols
1d0a3c9c 2605@item --exclude-symbols @var{symbol},@var{symbol},...
252b5132
RH
2606Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
2607exported. The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
bb10df36 2608[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2609
2927aaca
NC
2610@kindex --exclude-all-symbols
2611@item --exclude-all-symbols
2612Specifies no symbols should be automatically exported.
2613[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2614
252b5132
RH
2615@kindex --file-alignment
2616@item --file-alignment
2617Specify the file alignment. Sections in the file will always begin at
2618file offsets which are multiples of this number. This defaults to
2619512.
bb10df36 2620[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2621
2622@cindex heap size
2623@kindex --heap
2624@item --heap @var{reserve}
2625@itemx --heap @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5 2626Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
fe6d7d6a 2627to be used as heap for this program. The default is 1MB reserved, 4K
252b5132 2628committed.
bb10df36 2629[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2630
2631@cindex image base
2632@kindex --image-base
2633@item --image-base @var{value}
2634Use @var{value} as the base address of your program or dll. This is
2635the lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
2636is loaded. To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance of
2637your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not overlap any
2638other dlls. The default is 0x400000 for executables, and 0x10000000
2639for dlls.
bb10df36 2640[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2641
2642@kindex --kill-at
2643@item --kill-at
2644If given, the stdcall suffixes (@@@var{nn}) will be stripped from
2645symbols before they are exported.
bb10df36 2646[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2647
26d2d8a2
BF
2648@kindex --large-address-aware
2649@item --large-address-aware
b45619c0 2650If given, the appropriate bit in the ``Characteristics'' field of the COFF
26d2d8a2 2651header is set to indicate that this executable supports virtual addresses
b45619c0 2652greater than 2 gigabytes. This should be used in conjunction with the /3GB
26d2d8a2
BF
2653or /USERVA=@var{value} megabytes switch in the ``[operating systems]''
2654section of the BOOT.INI. Otherwise, this bit has no effect.
2655[This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2656
f69a2f97
NC
2657@kindex --disable-large-address-aware
2658@item --disable-large-address-aware
2659Reverts the effect of a previous @samp{--large-address-aware} option.
2660This is useful if @samp{--large-address-aware} is always set by the compiler
2661driver (e.g. Cygwin gcc) and the executable does not support virtual
2662addresses greater than 2 gigabytes.
2663[This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2664
252b5132
RH
2665@kindex --major-image-version
2666@item --major-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2667Sets the major number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 1.
bb10df36 2668[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2669
2670@kindex --major-os-version
2671@item --major-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2672Sets the major number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2673[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2674
2675@kindex --major-subsystem-version
2676@item --major-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2677Sets the major number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2678[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2679
2680@kindex --minor-image-version
2681@item --minor-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2682Sets the minor number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2683[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2684
2685@kindex --minor-os-version
2686@item --minor-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2687Sets the minor number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2688[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2689
2690@kindex --minor-subsystem-version
2691@item --minor-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2692Sets the minor number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2693[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2694
2695@cindex DEF files, creating
2696@cindex DLLs, creating
2697@kindex --output-def
2698@item --output-def @var{file}
2699The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain a DEF
2700file corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This DEF file
2701(which should be called @code{*.def}) may be used to create an import
2702library with @code{dlltool} or may be used as a reference to
2703automatically or implicitly exported symbols.
bb10df36 2704[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2705
b044cda1 2706@cindex DLLs, creating
b044cda1
CW
2707@kindex --enable-auto-image-base
2708@item --enable-auto-image-base
d0e6d77b
CF
2709@itemx --enable-auto-image-base=@var{value}
2710Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, optionally starting with base
2711@var{value}, unless one is specified using the @code{--image-base} argument.
2712By using a hash generated from the dllname to create unique image bases
2713for each DLL, in-memory collisions and relocations which can delay program
2714execution are avoided.
bb10df36 2715[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2716
2717@kindex --disable-auto-image-base
2718@item --disable-auto-image-base
2719Do not automatically generate a unique image base. If there is no
2720user-specified image base (@code{--image-base}) then use the platform
2721default.
bb10df36 2722[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2723
2724@cindex DLLs, linking to
2725@kindex --dll-search-prefix
2726@item --dll-search-prefix @var{string}
489d0400 2727When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
ece2d90e 2728search for @code{<string><basename>.dll} in preference to
560e09e9 2729@code{lib<basename>.dll}. This behaviour allows easy distinction
b044cda1
CW
2730between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
2731uwin, pw, etc. For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
ece2d90e 2732@code{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}.
bb10df36 2733[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2734
2735@kindex --enable-auto-import
2736@item --enable-auto-import
ece2d90e 2737Do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to @code{__imp__symbol} for
317ff008
EB
2738DATA imports from DLLs, thus making it possible to bypass the dllimport
2739mechanism on the user side and to reference unmangled symbol names.
2740[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2741
2742The following remarks pertain to the original implementation of the
2743feature and are obsolete nowadays for Cygwin and MinGW targets.
2744
2745Note: Use of the 'auto-import' extension will cause the text section
2746of the image file to be made writable. This does not conform to the
2747PE-COFF format specification published by Microsoft.
4d8907ac 2748
e2a83dd0
NC
2749Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only
2750data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
2751placed into the .data section instead. This is in order to work
2752around a problem with consts that is described here:
2753http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html
2754
4d8907ac
DS
2755Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' -- but sometimes you may
2756see this message:
0d888aac 2757
ece2d90e 2758"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
0d888aac
CW
2759documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
2760
ece2d90e
NC
2761This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
2762ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables only
c0065db7
RM
2763allow one). Instances where this may occur include accesses to member
2764fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well as using a
2765constant index into an array variable imported from a DLL. Any
2f8d8971
NC
2766multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may trigger
2767this error condition. However, regardless of the exact data type
2768of the offending exported variable, ld will always detect it, issue
2769the warning, and exit.
2770
2771There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of the
2772data type of the exported variable:
0d888aac 2773
2fa9fc65
NC
2774One way is to use --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves the task
2775of adjusting references in your client code for runtime environment, so
560e09e9 2776this method works only when runtime environment supports this feature.
2fa9fc65 2777
c0065db7
RM
2778A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a variable --
2779that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time. For arrays,
2780there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the array's address)
0d888aac
CW
2781a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a variable. Thus:
2782
2783@example
2784extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2785extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2786 @{ volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] @}
2787@end example
2788
2789or
2790
2791@example
2792extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2793extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2794 @{ volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] @}
2795@end example
2796
c0065db7 2797For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
2f8d8971 2798is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...) variable:
0d888aac
CW
2799
2800@example
2801extern struct s extern_struct;
c0065db7 2802extern_struct.field -->
0d888aac
CW
2803 @{ volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field @}
2804@end example
2805
c406afaf
NC
2806or
2807
2808@example
2809extern long long extern_ll;
2810extern_ll -->
2811 @{ volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll @}
2812@end example
2813
2fa9fc65 2814A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
c0065db7 2815'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
11e7fd74 2816@code{__declspec(dllimport)}. However, in practice that
0d888aac 2817requires using compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are
c0065db7
RM
2818building a DLL, building client code that will link to the DLL, or
2819merely building/linking to a static library. In making the choice
2820between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
0d888aac
CW
2821constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world usage:
2822
2823Original:
2824@example
2825--foo.h
2826extern int arr[];
2827--foo.c
2828#include "foo.h"
2829void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2830 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2831@}
2832@end example
2833
2834Solution 1:
2835@example
2836--foo.h
2837extern int arr[];
2838--foo.c
2839#include "foo.h"
2840void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2841 /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
2842 volatile int *parr = arr;
2843 printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
2844@}
2845@end example
2846
2847Solution 2:
2848@example
2849--foo.h
2850/* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
2851#if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
2852 !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
2853#define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
2854#else
2855#define FOO_IMPORT
2856#endif
2857extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
2858--foo.c
2859#include "foo.h"
2860void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2861 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2862@}
2863@end example
2864
c0065db7 2865A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your
0d888aac
CW
2866library to use a functional interface rather than a data interface
2867for the offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
2868functions).
b044cda1
CW
2869
2870@kindex --disable-auto-import
2871@item --disable-auto-import
c0065db7 2872Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to
b044cda1 2873@code{__imp__symbol} for DATA imports from DLLs.
bb10df36 2874[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2875
2fa9fc65
NC
2876@kindex --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2877@item --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2878If your code contains expressions described in --enable-auto-import section,
2879that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this switch will create
2880a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which can be used by runtime
c0065db7 2881environment to adjust references to such data in your client code.
bb10df36 2882[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65
NC
2883
2884@kindex --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2885@item --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
317ff008 2886Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports from DLLs.
bb10df36 2887[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65 2888
b044cda1
CW
2889@kindex --enable-extra-pe-debug
2890@item --enable-extra-pe-debug
2891Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
bb10df36 2892[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2893
252b5132
RH
2894@kindex --section-alignment
2895@item --section-alignment
2896Sets the section alignment. Sections in memory will always begin at
2897addresses which are a multiple of this number. Defaults to 0x1000.
bb10df36 2898[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2899
2900@cindex stack size
2901@kindex --stack
2902@item --stack @var{reserve}
2903@itemx --stack @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5 2904Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
fe6d7d6a 2905to be used as stack for this program. The default is 2MB reserved, 4K
252b5132 2906committed.
bb10df36 2907[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2908
2909@kindex --subsystem
2910@item --subsystem @var{which}
2911@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}
2912@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}.@var{minor}
2913Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute. The
2914legal values for @var{which} are @code{native}, @code{windows},
33f362e1
NC
2915@code{console}, @code{posix}, and @code{xbox}. You may optionally set
2916the subsystem version also. Numeric values are also accepted for
2917@var{which}.
bb10df36 2918[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2919
2f563b51
DK
2920The following options set flags in the @code{DllCharacteristics} field
2921of the PE file header:
2922[These options are specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2923
2d5c3743
NC
2924@kindex --high-entropy-va
2925@item --high-entropy-va
2926Image is compatible with 64-bit address space layout randomization
2927(ASLR).
2928
2f563b51
DK
2929@kindex --dynamicbase
2930@item --dynamicbase
2931The image base address may be relocated using address space layout
2932randomization (ASLR). This feature was introduced with MS Windows
2933Vista for i386 PE targets.
2934
2935@kindex --forceinteg
2936@item --forceinteg
2937Code integrity checks are enforced.
2938
2939@kindex --nxcompat
2940@item --nxcompat
2941The image is compatible with the Data Execution Prevention.
2942This feature was introduced with MS Windows XP SP2 for i386 PE targets.
2943
2944@kindex --no-isolation
2945@item --no-isolation
2946Although the image understands isolation, do not isolate the image.
2947
2948@kindex --no-seh
2949@item --no-seh
2950The image does not use SEH. No SE handler may be called from
2951this image.
2952
2953@kindex --no-bind
2954@item --no-bind
2955Do not bind this image.
2956
2957@kindex --wdmdriver
2958@item --wdmdriver
2959The driver uses the MS Windows Driver Model.
9d5777a3 2960
2f563b51
DK
2961@kindex --tsaware
2962@item --tsaware
2963The image is Terminal Server aware.
2964
0cb112f7
CF
2965@kindex --insert-timestamp
2966@item --insert-timestamp
eeb14e5a
LZ
2967@itemx --no-insert-timestamp
2968Insert a real timestamp into the image. This is the default behaviour
2969as it matches legacy code and it means that the image will work with
2970other, proprietary tools. The problem with this default is that it
56e6cf80 2971will result in slightly different images being produced each time the
eeb14e5a
LZ
2972same sources are linked. The option @option{--no-insert-timestamp}
2973can be used to insert a zero value for the timestamp, this ensuring
56e6cf80 2974that binaries produced from identical sources will compare
eeb14e5a 2975identically.
252b5132
RH
2976@end table
2977
0285c67d
NC
2978@c man end
2979
ac145307
BS
2980@ifset C6X
2981@subsection Options specific to C6X uClinux targets
2982
2983@c man begin OPTIONS
2984
2985The C6X uClinux target uses a binary format called DSBT to support shared
2986libraries. Each shared library in the system needs to have a unique index;
2987all executables use an index of 0.
2988
2989@table @gcctabopt
2990
2991@kindex --dsbt-size
2992@item --dsbt-size @var{size}
56e6cf80 2993This option sets the number of entries in the DSBT of the current executable
ac145307
BS
2994or shared library to @var{size}. The default is to create a table with 64
2995entries.
2996
2997@kindex --dsbt-index
2998@item --dsbt-index @var{index}
2999This option sets the DSBT index of the current executable or shared library
3000to @var{index}. The default is 0, which is appropriate for generating
3001executables. If a shared library is generated with a DSBT index of 0, the
3002@code{R_C6000_DSBT_INDEX} relocs are copied into the output file.
3003
fbd9ad90
PB
3004@kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
3005The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent
3006exidx entries in frame unwind info.
3007
ac145307
BS
3008@end table
3009
3010@c man end
3011@end ifset
3012
b8891f8d
AJ
3013@ifset CSKY
3014@subsection Options specific to C-SKY targets
3015
3016@c man begin OPTIONS
3017
3018@table @gcctabopt
3019
3020@kindex --branch-stub on C-SKY
3021@item --branch-stub
3022This option enables linker branch relaxation by inserting branch stub
3023sections when needed to extend the range of branches. This option is
3024usually not required since C-SKY supports branch and call instructions that
3025can access the full memory range and branch relaxation is normally handled by
3026the compiler or assembler.
3027
3028@kindex --stub-group-size on C-SKY
3029@item --stub-group-size=@var{N}
3030This option allows finer control of linker branch stub creation.
3031It sets the maximum size of a group of input sections that can
3032be handled by one stub section. A negative value of @var{N} locates
3033stub sections after their branches, while a positive value allows stub
3034sections to appear either before or after the branches. Values of
3035@samp{1} or @samp{-1} indicate that the
3036linker should choose suitable defaults.
3037
3038@end table
3039
3040@c man end
3041@end ifset
3042
93fd0973
SC
3043@ifset M68HC11
3044@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
3045
3046@c man begin OPTIONS
3047
3048The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
3049memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
3050
3051@table @gcctabopt
3052
3053@kindex --no-trampoline
3054@item --no-trampoline
3055This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a trampoline
3056is generated for each far function which is called using a @code{jsr}
3057instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far function is taken).
3058
3059@kindex --bank-window
3060@item --bank-window @var{name}
3061This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region in
3062the @samp{MEMORY} specification that describes the memory bank window.
3063The definition of such region is then used by the linker to compute
3064paging and addresses within the memory window.
3065
3066@end table
3067
3068@c man end
3069@end ifset
3070
7fb9f789
NC
3071@ifset M68K
3072@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68K target
3073
3074@c man begin OPTIONS
3075
3076The following options are supported to control handling of GOT generation
3077when linking for 68K targets.
3078
3079@table @gcctabopt
3080
3081@kindex --got
3082@item --got=@var{type}
3083This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
3084@var{type} should be one of @samp{single}, @samp{negative},
3085@samp{multigot} or @samp{target}. For more information refer to the
3086Info entry for @file{ld}.
3087
3088@end table
3089
3090@c man end
3091@end ifset
3092
833794fc
MR
3093@ifset MIPS
3094@subsection Options specific to MIPS targets
3095
3096@c man begin OPTIONS
3097
3098The following options are supported to control microMIPS instruction
8b10b0b3
MR
3099generation and branch relocation checks for ISA mode transitions when
3100linking for MIPS targets.
833794fc
MR
3101
3102@table @gcctabopt
3103
3104@kindex --insn32
3105@item --insn32
3106@kindex --no-insn32
3107@itemx --no-insn32
3108These options control the choice of microMIPS instructions used in code
3109generated by the linker, such as that in the PLT or lazy binding stubs,
3110or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is used, then the linker only uses
311132-bit instruction encodings. By default or if @samp{--no-insn32} is
3112used, all instruction encodings are used, including 16-bit ones where
3113possible.
3114
8b10b0b3
MR
3115@kindex --ignore-branch-isa
3116@item --ignore-branch-isa
3117@kindex --no-ignore-branch-isa
3118@itemx --no-ignore-branch-isa
3119These options control branch relocation checks for invalid ISA mode
3120transitions. If @samp{--ignore-branch-isa} is used, then the linker
3121accepts any branch relocations and any ISA mode transition required
3122is lost in relocation calculation, except for some cases of @code{BAL}
3123instructions which meet relaxation conditions and are converted to
3124equivalent @code{JALX} instructions as the associated relocation is
3125calculated. By default or if @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} is used
3126a check is made causing the loss of an ISA mode transition to produce
3127an error.
3128
833794fc
MR
3129@end table
3130
3131@c man end
3132@end ifset
3133
252b5132
RH
3134@ifset UsesEnvVars
3135@node Environment
3136@section Environment Variables
3137
0285c67d
NC
3138@c man begin ENVIRONMENT
3139
560e09e9 3140You can change the behaviour of @command{ld} with the environment variables
36f63dca
NC
3141@ifclear SingleFormat
3142@code{GNUTARGET},
3143@end ifclear
3144@code{LDEMULATION} and @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}.
252b5132 3145
36f63dca 3146@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
3147@kindex GNUTARGET
3148@cindex default input format
3149@code{GNUTARGET} determines the input-file object format if you don't
3150use @samp{-b} (or its synonym @samp{--format}). Its value should be one
3151of the BFD names for an input format (@pxref{BFD}). If there is no
ff5dcc92 3152@code{GNUTARGET} in the environment, @command{ld} uses the natural format
252b5132
RH
3153of the target. If @code{GNUTARGET} is set to @code{default} then BFD
3154attempts to discover the input format by examining binary input files;
3155this method often succeeds, but there are potential ambiguities, since
3156there is no method of ensuring that the magic number used to specify
3157object-file formats is unique. However, the configuration procedure for
3158BFD on each system places the conventional format for that system first
3159in the search-list, so ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
36f63dca 3160@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
3161
3162@kindex LDEMULATION
3163@cindex default emulation
3164@cindex emulation, default
3165@code{LDEMULATION} determines the default emulation if you don't use the
3166@samp{-m} option. The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
3167behaviour, particularly the default linker script. You can list the
3168available emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options. If
3169the @samp{-m} option is not used, and the @code{LDEMULATION} environment
3170variable is not defined, the default emulation depends upon how the
3171linker was configured.
252b5132
RH
3172
3173@kindex COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE
3174@cindex demangling, default
3175Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols. However, if
3176@code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE} is set in the environment, then it will
3177default to not demangling symbols. This environment variable is used in
3178a similar fashion by the @code{gcc} linker wrapper program. The default
3179may be overridden by the @samp{--demangle} and @samp{--no-demangle}
3180options.
3181
0285c67d
NC
3182@c man end
3183@end ifset
3184
252b5132
RH
3185@node Scripts
3186@chapter Linker Scripts
3187
3188@cindex scripts
3189@cindex linker scripts
3190@cindex command files
3191Every link is controlled by a @dfn{linker script}. This script is
3192written in the linker command language.
3193
3194The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the sections in
3195the input files should be mapped into the output file, and to control
3196the memory layout of the output file. Most linker scripts do nothing
3197more than this. However, when necessary, the linker script can also
3198direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the commands
3199described below.
3200
3201The linker always uses a linker script. If you do not supply one
3202yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
a05a5b64
TP
3203linker executable. You can use the @samp{--verbose} command-line option
3204to display the default linker script. Certain command-line options,
252b5132
RH
3205such as @samp{-r} or @samp{-N}, will affect the default linker script.
3206
3207You may supply your own linker script by using the @samp{-T} command
3208line option. When you do this, your linker script will replace the
3209default linker script.
3210
3211You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input files
3212to the linker, as though they were files to be linked. @xref{Implicit
3213Linker Scripts}.
3214
3215@menu
3216* Basic Script Concepts:: Basic Linker Script Concepts
3217* Script Format:: Linker Script Format
3218* Simple Example:: Simple Linker Script Example
3219* Simple Commands:: Simple Linker Script Commands
3220* Assignments:: Assigning Values to Symbols
3221* SECTIONS:: SECTIONS Command
3222* MEMORY:: MEMORY Command
3223* PHDRS:: PHDRS Command
3224* VERSION:: VERSION Command
3225* Expressions:: Expressions in Linker Scripts
3226* Implicit Linker Scripts:: Implicit Linker Scripts
3227@end menu
3228
3229@node Basic Script Concepts
3230@section Basic Linker Script Concepts
3231@cindex linker script concepts
3232We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
3233describe the linker script language.
3234
3235The linker combines input files into a single output file. The output
3236file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
3237@dfn{object file format}. Each file is called an @dfn{object file}.
3238The output file is often called an @dfn{executable}, but for our
3239purposes we will also call it an object file. Each object file has,
3240among other things, a list of @dfn{sections}. We sometimes refer to a
3241section in an input file as an @dfn{input section}; similarly, a section
3242in the output file is an @dfn{output section}.
3243
3244Each section in an object file has a name and a size. Most sections
3245also have an associated block of data, known as the @dfn{section
56dd11f0 3246contents}. A section may be marked as @dfn{loadable}, which means that
252b5132
RH
3247the contents should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.
3248A section with no contents may be @dfn{allocatable}, which means that an
3249area in memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be
3250loaded there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out). A section
3251which is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort
3252of debugging information.
3253
3254Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses. The
3255first is the @dfn{VMA}, or virtual memory address. This is the address
3256the section will have when the output file is run. The second is the
3257@dfn{LMA}, or load memory address. This is the address at which the
3258section will be loaded. In most cases the two addresses will be the
3259same. An example of when they might be different is when a data section
3260is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
3261(this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
3262based system). In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
3263RAM address would be the VMA.
3264
3265You can see the sections in an object file by using the @code{objdump}
3266program with the @samp{-h} option.
3267
3268Every object file also has a list of @dfn{symbols}, known as the
3269@dfn{symbol table}. A symbol may be defined or undefined. Each symbol
3270has a name, and each defined symbol has an address, among other
3271information. If you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you
3272will get a defined symbol for every defined function and global or
3273static variable. Every undefined function or global variable which is
3274referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
3275
3276You can see the symbols in an object file by using the @code{nm}
3277program, or by using the @code{objdump} program with the @samp{-t}
3278option.
3279
3280@node Script Format
3281@section Linker Script Format
3282@cindex linker script format
3283Linker scripts are text files.
3284
3285You write a linker script as a series of commands. Each command is
3286either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
3287symbol. You may separate commands using semicolons. Whitespace is
3288generally ignored.
3289
3290Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered directly.
3291If the file name contains a character such as a comma which would
3292otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name in
3293double quotes. There is no way to use a double quote character in a
3294file name.
3295
3296You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
3297@samp{/*} and @samp{*/}. As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent
3298to whitespace.
3299
3300@node Simple Example
3301@section Simple Linker Script Example
3302@cindex linker script example
3303@cindex example of linker script
3304Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
3305
3306The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
3307@samp{SECTIONS}. You use the @samp{SECTIONS} command to describe the
3308memory layout of the output file.
3309
3310The @samp{SECTIONS} command is a powerful command. Here we will
3311describe a simple use of it. Let's assume your program consists only of
3312code, initialized data, and uninitialized data. These will be in the
3313@samp{.text}, @samp{.data}, and @samp{.bss} sections, respectively.
3314Let's assume further that these are the only sections which appear in
3315your input files.
3316
3317For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
33180x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000. Here is a
3319linker script which will do that:
3320@smallexample
3321SECTIONS
3322@{
3323 . = 0x10000;
3324 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
3325 . = 0x8000000;
3326 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3327 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
3328@}
3329@end smallexample
3330
3331You write the @samp{SECTIONS} command as the keyword @samp{SECTIONS},
3332followed by a series of symbol assignments and output section
3333descriptions enclosed in curly braces.
3334
252b5132
RH
3335The first line inside the @samp{SECTIONS} command of the above example
3336sets the value of the special symbol @samp{.}, which is the location
3337counter. If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
3338other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
3339current value of the location counter. The location counter is then
3340incremented by the size of the output section. At the start of the
3341@samp{SECTIONS} command, the location counter has the value @samp{0}.
3342
3343The second line defines an output section, @samp{.text}. The colon is
3344required syntax which may be ignored for now. Within the curly braces
3345after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
3346which should be placed into this output section. The @samp{*} is a
3347wildcard which matches any file name. The expression @samp{*(.text)}
3348means all @samp{.text} input sections in all input files.
3349
3350Since the location counter is @samp{0x10000} when the output section
3351@samp{.text} is defined, the linker will set the address of the
3352@samp{.text} section in the output file to be @samp{0x10000}.
3353
3354The remaining lines define the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss} sections in
3355the output file. The linker will place the @samp{.data} output section
3356at address @samp{0x8000000}. After the linker places the @samp{.data}
3357output section, the value of the location counter will be
3358@samp{0x8000000} plus the size of the @samp{.data} output section. The
3359effect is that the linker will place the @samp{.bss} output section
58434bc1 3360immediately after the @samp{.data} output section in memory.
252b5132
RH
3361
3362The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
3363alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary. In this
3364example, the specified addresses for the @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}
3365sections will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker
3366may have to create a small gap between the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss}
3367sections.
3368
3369That's it! That's a simple and complete linker script.
3370
3371@node Simple Commands
3372@section Simple Linker Script Commands
3373@cindex linker script simple commands
3374In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
3375
3376@menu
3377* Entry Point:: Setting the entry point
3378* File Commands:: Commands dealing with files
3379@ifclear SingleFormat
3380* Format Commands:: Commands dealing with object file formats
3381@end ifclear
3382
4a93e180 3383* REGION_ALIAS:: Assign alias names to memory regions
252b5132
RH
3384* Miscellaneous Commands:: Other linker script commands
3385@end menu
3386
3387@node Entry Point
36f63dca 3388@subsection Setting the Entry Point
252b5132
RH
3389@kindex ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3390@cindex start of execution
3391@cindex first instruction
3392@cindex entry point
3393The first instruction to execute in a program is called the @dfn{entry
3394point}. You can use the @code{ENTRY} linker script command to set the
3395entry point. The argument is a symbol name:
3396@smallexample
3397ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3398@end smallexample
3399
3400There are several ways to set the entry point. The linker will set the
3401entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
3402stopping when one of them succeeds:
3403@itemize @bullet
a1ab1d2a 3404@item
252b5132 3405the @samp{-e} @var{entry} command-line option;
a1ab1d2a 3406@item
252b5132 3407the @code{ENTRY(@var{symbol})} command in a linker script;
a1ab1d2a 3408@item
3ab904c4
NC
3409the value of a target specific symbol, if it is defined; For many
3410targets this is @code{start}, but PE and BeOS based systems for example
3411check a list of possible entry symbols, matching the first one found.
a1ab1d2a 3412@item
252b5132 3413the address of the first byte of the @samp{.text} section, if present;
a1ab1d2a 3414@item
252b5132
RH
3415The address @code{0}.
3416@end itemize
3417
3418@node File Commands
36f63dca 3419@subsection Commands Dealing with Files
252b5132
RH
3420@cindex linker script file commands
3421Several linker script commands deal with files.
3422
3423@table @code
3424@item INCLUDE @var{filename}
3425@kindex INCLUDE @var{filename}
3426@cindex including a linker script
3427Include the linker script @var{filename} at this point. The file will
3428be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory specified
ff5dcc92 3429with the @option{-L} option. You can nest calls to @code{INCLUDE} up to
252b5132
RH
343010 levels deep.
3431
4006703d
NS
3432You can place @code{INCLUDE} directives at the top level, in @code{MEMORY} or
3433@code{SECTIONS} commands, or in output section descriptions.
3434
252b5132
RH
3435@item INPUT(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3436@itemx INPUT(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3437@kindex INPUT(@var{files})
3438@cindex input files in linker scripts
3439@cindex input object files in linker scripts
3440@cindex linker script input object files
3441The @code{INPUT} command directs the linker to include the named files
3442in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
3443
3444For example, if you always want to include @file{subr.o} any time you do
3445a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command line,
3446then you can put @samp{INPUT (subr.o)} in your linker script.
3447
3448In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the linker
3449script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a @samp{-T} option.
3450
e3f2db7f
AO
3451In case a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is configured, and the filename starts
3452with the @samp{/} character, and the script being processed was
3453located inside the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, the filename will be looked
3454for in the @dfn{sysroot prefix}. Otherwise, the linker will try to
3455open the file in the current directory. If it is not found, the
cad60a33
HPN
3456linker will search through the archive library search path.
3457The @dfn{sysroot prefix} can also be forced by specifying @code{=}
3aa2d05a
NC
3458as the first character in the filename path, or prefixing the filename
3459path with @code{$SYSROOT}. See also the description of @samp{-L} in
a05a5b64 3460@ref{Options,,Command-line Options}.
252b5132 3461
ff5dcc92 3462If you use @samp{INPUT (-l@var{file})}, @command{ld} will transform the
a05a5b64 3463name to @code{lib@var{file}.a}, as with the command-line argument
252b5132
RH
3464@samp{-l}.
3465
3466When you use the @code{INPUT} command in an implicit linker script, the
3467files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
3468script file is included. This can affect archive searching.
3469
3470@item GROUP(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3471@itemx GROUP(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3472@kindex GROUP(@var{files})
3473@cindex grouping input files
3474The @code{GROUP} command is like @code{INPUT}, except that the named
3475files should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
3476new undefined references are created. See the description of @samp{-(}
a05a5b64 3477in @ref{Options,,Command-line Options}.
252b5132 3478
b717d30e
JJ
3479@item AS_NEEDED(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3480@itemx AS_NEEDED(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3481@kindex AS_NEEDED(@var{files})
3482This construct can appear only inside of the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP}
3483commands, among other filenames. The files listed will be handled
3484as if they appear directly in the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} commands,
3485with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
3486when they are actually needed. This construct essentially enables
3487@option{--as-needed} option for all the files listed inside of it
3488and restores previous @option{--as-needed} resp. @option{--no-as-needed}
3489setting afterwards.
3490
252b5132
RH
3491@item OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3492@kindex OUTPUT(@var{filename})
b45619c0 3493@cindex output file name in linker script
252b5132
RH
3494The @code{OUTPUT} command names the output file. Using
3495@code{OUTPUT(@var{filename})} in the linker script is exactly like using
3496@samp{-o @var{filename}} on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command
a05a5b64 3497Line Options}). If both are used, the command-line option takes
252b5132
RH
3498precedence.
3499
3500You can use the @code{OUTPUT} command to define a default name for the
3501output file other than the usual default of @file{a.out}.
3502
3503@item SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3504@kindex SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3505@cindex library search path in linker script
3506@cindex archive search path in linker script
3507@cindex search path in linker script
3508The @code{SEARCH_DIR} command adds @var{path} to the list of paths where
ff5dcc92 3509@command{ld} looks for archive libraries. Using
252b5132 3510@code{SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})} is exactly like using @samp{-L @var{path}}
a05a5b64 3511on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command-line Options}). If both
252b5132 3512are used, then the linker will search both paths. Paths specified using
a05a5b64 3513the command-line option are searched first.
252b5132
RH
3514
3515@item STARTUP(@var{filename})
3516@kindex STARTUP(@var{filename})
3517@cindex first input file
3518The @code{STARTUP} command is just like the @code{INPUT} command, except
3519that @var{filename} will become the first input file to be linked, as
3520though it were specified first on the command line. This may be useful
3521when using a system in which the entry point is always the start of the
3522first file.
3523@end table
3524
3525@ifclear SingleFormat
3526@node Format Commands
36f63dca 3527@subsection Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
252b5132
RH
3528A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
3529
3530@table @code
3531@item OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3532@itemx OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{default}, @var{big}, @var{little})
3533@kindex OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3534@cindex output file format in linker script
3535The @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command names the BFD format to use for the
3536output file (@pxref{BFD}). Using @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})} is
024531e2 3537exactly like using @samp{--oformat @var{bfdname}} on the command line
a05a5b64 3538(@pxref{Options,,Command-line Options}). If both are used, the command
252b5132
RH
3539line option takes precedence.
3540
3541You can use @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} with three arguments to use different
a05a5b64 3542formats based on the @samp{-EB} and @samp{-EL} command-line options.
252b5132
RH
3543This permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
3544desired endianness.
3545
3546If neither @samp{-EB} nor @samp{-EL} are used, then the output format
3547will be the first argument, @var{default}. If @samp{-EB} is used, the
3548output format will be the second argument, @var{big}. If @samp{-EL} is
3549used, the output format will be the third argument, @var{little}.
3550
3551For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target uses this
3552command:
3553@smallexample
3554OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
3555@end smallexample
3556This says that the default format for the output file is
a05a5b64 3557@samp{elf32-bigmips}, but if the user uses the @samp{-EL} command-line
252b5132
RH
3558option, the output file will be created in the @samp{elf32-littlemips}
3559format.
3560
3561@item TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3562@kindex TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3563@cindex input file format in linker script
3564The @code{TARGET} command names the BFD format to use when reading input
3565files. It affects subsequent @code{INPUT} and @code{GROUP} commands.
3566This command is like using @samp{-b @var{bfdname}} on the command line
a05a5b64 3567(@pxref{Options,,Command-line Options}). If the @code{TARGET} command
252b5132
RH
3568is used but @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} is not, then the last @code{TARGET}
3569command is also used to set the format for the output file. @xref{BFD}.
3570@end table
3571@end ifclear
3572
4a93e180
NC
3573@node REGION_ALIAS
3574@subsection Assign alias names to memory regions
3575@kindex REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3576@cindex region alias
3577@cindex region names
3578
3579Alias names can be added to existing memory regions created with the
3580@ref{MEMORY} command. Each name corresponds to at most one memory region.
3581
3582@smallexample
3583REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3584@end smallexample
3585
3586The @code{REGION_ALIAS} function creates an alias name @var{alias} for the
3587memory region @var{region}. This allows a flexible mapping of output sections
3588to memory regions. An example follows.
3589
3590Suppose we have an application for embedded systems which come with various
3591memory storage devices. All have a general purpose, volatile memory @code{RAM}
3592that allows code execution or data storage. Some may have a read-only,
3593non-volatile memory @code{ROM} that allows code execution and read-only data
3594access. The last variant is a read-only, non-volatile memory @code{ROM2} with
3595read-only data access and no code execution capability. We have four output
3596sections:
3597
3598@itemize @bullet
3599@item
3600@code{.text} program code;
3601@item
3602@code{.rodata} read-only data;
3603@item
3604@code{.data} read-write initialized data;
3605@item
3606@code{.bss} read-write zero initialized data.
3607@end itemize
3608
3609The goal is to provide a linker command file that contains a system independent
3610part defining the output sections and a system dependent part mapping the
3611output sections to the memory regions available on the system. Our embedded
3612systems come with three different memory setups @code{A}, @code{B} and
3613@code{C}:
3614@multitable @columnfractions .25 .25 .25 .25
3615@item Section @tab Variant A @tab Variant B @tab Variant C
9d5777a3 3616@item .text @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM
4a93e180
NC
3617@item .rodata @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM2
3618@item .data @tab RAM @tab RAM/ROM @tab RAM/ROM2
3619@item .bss @tab RAM @tab RAM @tab RAM
3620@end multitable
3621The notation @code{RAM/ROM} or @code{RAM/ROM2} means that this section is
3622loaded into region @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} respectively. Please note that
3623the load address of the @code{.data} section starts in all three variants at
3624the end of the @code{.rodata} section.
3625
3626The base linker script that deals with the output sections follows. It
3627includes the system dependent @code{linkcmds.memory} file that describes the
3628memory layout:
3629@smallexample
3630INCLUDE linkcmds.memory
3631
3632SECTIONS
3633 @{
3634 .text :
3635 @{
3636 *(.text)
3637 @} > REGION_TEXT
3638 .rodata :
3639 @{
3640 *(.rodata)
3641 rodata_end = .;
3642 @} > REGION_RODATA
3643 .data : AT (rodata_end)
3644 @{
3645 data_start = .;
3646 *(.data)
3647 @} > REGION_DATA
3648 data_size = SIZEOF(.data);
3649 data_load_start = LOADADDR(.data);
3650 .bss :
3651 @{
3652 *(.bss)
3653 @} > REGION_BSS
3654 @}
3655@end smallexample
3656
3657Now we need three different @code{linkcmds.memory} files to define memory
3658regions and alias names. The content of @code{linkcmds.memory} for the three
3659variants @code{A}, @code{B} and @code{C}:
3660@table @code
3661@item A
3662Here everything goes into the @code{RAM}.
3663@smallexample
3664MEMORY
3665 @{
3666 RAM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 4M
3667 @}
3668
3669REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", RAM);
3670REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", RAM);
3671REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3672REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3673@end smallexample
3674@item B
3675Program code and read-only data go into the @code{ROM}. Read-write data goes
3676into the @code{RAM}. An image of the initialized data is loaded into the
3677@code{ROM} and will be copied during system start into the @code{RAM}.
3678@smallexample
3679MEMORY
3680 @{
3681 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 3M
3682 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3683 @}
3684
3685REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3686REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM);
3687REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3688REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3689@end smallexample
3690@item C
3691Program code goes into the @code{ROM}. Read-only data goes into the
3692@code{ROM2}. Read-write data goes into the @code{RAM}. An image of the
3693initialized data is loaded into the @code{ROM2} and will be copied during
3694system start into the @code{RAM}.
3695@smallexample
3696MEMORY
3697 @{
3698 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 2M
3699 ROM2 : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3700 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x20000000, LENGTH = 1M
3701 @}
3702
3703REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3704REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM2);
3705REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3706REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3707@end smallexample
3708@end table
3709
3710It is possible to write a common system initialization routine to copy the
3711@code{.data} section from @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} into the @code{RAM} if
3712necessary:
3713@smallexample
3714#include <string.h>
3715
3716extern char data_start [];
3717extern char data_size [];
3718extern char data_load_start [];
3719
3720void copy_data(void)
3721@{
3722 if (data_start != data_load_start)
3723 @{
3724 memcpy(data_start, data_load_start, (size_t) data_size);
3725 @}
3726@}
3727@end smallexample
3728
252b5132 3729@node Miscellaneous Commands
36f63dca 3730@subsection Other Linker Script Commands
252b5132
RH
3731There are a few other linker scripts commands.
3732
3733@table @code
3734@item ASSERT(@var{exp}, @var{message})
3735@kindex ASSERT
3736@cindex assertion in linker script
3737Ensure that @var{exp} is non-zero. If it is zero, then exit the linker
3738with an error code, and print @var{message}.
3739
fd1c4238
NC
3740Note that assertions are checked before the final stages of linking
3741take place. This means that expressions involving symbols PROVIDEd
3742inside section definitions will fail if the user has not set values
3743for those symbols. The only exception to this rule is PROVIDEd
3744symbols that just reference dot. Thus an assertion like this:
3745
3746@smallexample
3747 .stack :
3748 @{
3749 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3750 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3751 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3752 @}
3753@end smallexample
3754
3755will fail if @code{__stack_size} is not defined elsewhere. Symbols
3756PROVIDEd outside of section definitions are evaluated earlier, so they
3757can be used inside ASSERTions. Thus:
3758
3759@smallexample
3760 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3761 .stack :
3762 @{
3763 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3764 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3765 @}
3766@end smallexample
3767
3768will work.
3769
252b5132
RH
3770@item EXTERN(@var{symbol} @var{symbol} @dots{})
3771@kindex EXTERN
3772@cindex undefined symbol in linker script
3773Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
3774symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
3775modules from standard libraries. You may list several @var{symbol}s for
3776each @code{EXTERN}, and you may use @code{EXTERN} multiple times. This
3777command has the same effect as the @samp{-u} command-line option.
3778
3779@item FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3780@kindex FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3781@cindex common allocation in linker script
3782This command has the same effect as the @samp{-d} command-line option:
ff5dcc92 3783to make @command{ld} assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
252b5132
RH
3784output file is specified (@samp{-r}).
3785
4818e05f
AM
3786@item INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3787@kindex INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3788@cindex common allocation in linker script
3789This command has the same effect as the @samp{--no-define-common}
3790command-line option: to make @code{ld} omit the assignment of addresses
3791to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
3792
7bdf4127
AB
3793@item FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION
3794@kindex FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION
3795@cindex group allocation in linker script
3796@cindex section groups
3797@cindex COMDAT
3798This command has the same effect as the
3799@samp{--force-group-allocation} command-line option: to make
3800@command{ld} place section group members like normal input sections,
3801and to delete the section groups even if a relocatable output file is
3802specified (@samp{-r}).
3803
53d25da6
AM
3804@item INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] @var{output_section}
3805@kindex INSERT
3806@cindex insert user script into default script
3807This command is typically used in a script specified by @samp{-T} to
3808augment the default @code{SECTIONS} with, for example, overlays. It
3809inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
3810@var{output_section}, and also causes @samp{-T} to not override the
3811default linker script. The exact insertion point is as for orphan
3812sections. @xref{Location Counter}. The insertion happens after the
3813linker has mapped input sections to output sections. Prior to the
3814insertion, since @samp{-T} scripts are parsed before the default
3815linker script, statements in the @samp{-T} script occur before the
3816default linker script statements in the internal linker representation
3817of the script. In particular, input section assignments will be made
3818to @samp{-T} output sections before those in the default script. Here
3819is an example of how a @samp{-T} script using @code{INSERT} might look:
3820
3821@smallexample
3822SECTIONS
3823@{
3824 OVERLAY :
3825 @{
3826 .ov1 @{ ov1*(.text) @}
3827 .ov2 @{ ov2*(.text) @}
3828 @}
3829@}
3830INSERT AFTER .text;
3831@end smallexample
3832
252b5132
RH
3833@item NOCROSSREFS(@var{section} @var{section} @dots{})
3834@kindex NOCROSSREFS(@var{sections})
3835@cindex cross references
ff5dcc92 3836This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
252b5132
RH
3837references among certain output sections.
3838
3839In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
3840using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another section
3841will not be. Any direct references between the two sections would be
3842errors. For example, it would be an error if code in one section called
3843a function defined in the other section.
3844
3845The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command takes a list of output section names. If
ff5dcc92 3846@command{ld} detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
252b5132
RH
3847an error and returns a non-zero exit status. Note that the
3848@code{NOCROSSREFS} command uses output section names, not input section
3849names.
3850
cdf96953
MF
3851@item NOCROSSREFS_TO(@var{tosection} @var{fromsection} @dots{})
3852@kindex NOCROSSREFS_TO(@var{tosection} @var{fromsections})
3853@cindex cross references
3854This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
3855references to one section from a list of other sections.
3856
3857The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command is useful when ensuring that two or more
3858output sections are entirely independent but there are situations where
3859a one-way dependency is needed. For example, in a multi-core application
3860there may be shared code that can be called from each core but for safety
3861must never call back.
3862
3863The @code{NOCROSSREFS_TO} command takes a list of output section names.
3864The first section can not be referenced from any of the other sections.
3865If @command{ld} detects any references to the first section from any of
3866the other sections, it reports an error and returns a non-zero exit
3867status. Note that the @code{NOCROSSREFS_TO} command uses output section
3868names, not input section names.
3869
252b5132
RH
3870@ifclear SingleFormat
3871@item OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3872@kindex OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3873@cindex machine architecture
3874@cindex architecture
3875Specify a particular output machine architecture. The argument is one
3876of the names used by the BFD library (@pxref{BFD}). You can see the
3877architecture of an object file by using the @code{objdump} program with
3878the @samp{-f} option.
3879@end ifclear
01554a74
AM
3880
3881@item LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3882@kindex LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3883This command may be used to modify @command{ld} behavior. If
3884@var{string} is @code{"SANE_EXPR"} then absolute symbols and numbers
3885in a script are simply treated as numbers everywhere.
3886@xref{Expression Section}.
252b5132
RH
3887@end table
3888
3889@node Assignments
3890@section Assigning Values to Symbols
3891@cindex assignment in scripts
3892@cindex symbol definition, scripts
3893@cindex variables, defining
3894You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script. This will define
73ae6183 3895the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
252b5132
RH
3896
3897@menu
3898* Simple Assignments:: Simple Assignments
eb8476a6 3899* HIDDEN:: HIDDEN
252b5132 3900* PROVIDE:: PROVIDE
7af8e998 3901* PROVIDE_HIDDEN:: PROVIDE_HIDDEN
73ae6183 3902* Source Code Reference:: How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
252b5132
RH
3903@end menu
3904
3905@node Simple Assignments
3906@subsection Simple Assignments
3907
3908You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
3909
3910@table @code
3911@item @var{symbol} = @var{expression} ;
3912@itemx @var{symbol} += @var{expression} ;
3913@itemx @var{symbol} -= @var{expression} ;
3914@itemx @var{symbol} *= @var{expression} ;
3915@itemx @var{symbol} /= @var{expression} ;
3916@itemx @var{symbol} <<= @var{expression} ;
3917@itemx @var{symbol} >>= @var{expression} ;
3918@itemx @var{symbol} &= @var{expression} ;
3919@itemx @var{symbol} |= @var{expression} ;
3920@end table
3921
3922The first case will define @var{symbol} to the value of
3923@var{expression}. In the other cases, @var{symbol} must already be
3924defined, and the value will be adjusted accordingly.
3925
3926The special symbol name @samp{.} indicates the location counter. You
b5666f2f 3927may only use this within a @code{SECTIONS} command. @xref{Location Counter}.
252b5132
RH
3928
3929The semicolon after @var{expression} is required.
3930
3931Expressions are defined below; see @ref{Expressions}.
3932
3933You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or as
3934statements within a @code{SECTIONS} command, or as part of an output
3935section description in a @code{SECTIONS} command.
3936
3937The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
3938expression; for more information, see @ref{Expression Section}.
3939
3940Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
3941assignments may be used:
3942
3943@smallexample
3944floating_point = 0;
3945SECTIONS
3946@{
3947 .text :
3948 @{
3949 *(.text)
3950 _etext = .;
3951 @}
156e34dd 3952 _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
252b5132
RH
3953 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3954@}
3955@end smallexample
3956@noindent
3957In this example, the symbol @samp{floating_point} will be defined as
3958zero. The symbol @samp{_etext} will be defined as the address following
3959the last @samp{.text} input section. The symbol @samp{_bdata} will be
3960defined as the address following the @samp{.text} output section aligned
3961upward to a 4 byte boundary.
3962
eb8476a6
MR
3963@node HIDDEN
3964@subsection HIDDEN
3965@cindex HIDDEN
3966For ELF targeted ports, define a symbol that will be hidden and won't be
3967exported. The syntax is @code{HIDDEN(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3968
3969Here is the example from @ref{Simple Assignments}, rewritten to use
3970@code{HIDDEN}:
3971
3972@smallexample
3973HIDDEN(floating_point = 0);
3974SECTIONS
3975@{
3976 .text :
3977 @{
3978 *(.text)
3979 HIDDEN(_etext = .);
3980 @}
3981 HIDDEN(_bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3);
3982 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3983@}
3984@end smallexample
3985@noindent
3986In this case none of the three symbols will be visible outside this module.
3987
252b5132
RH
3988@node PROVIDE
3989@subsection PROVIDE
3990@cindex PROVIDE
3991In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
3992only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
3993the link. For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol
3994@samp{etext}. However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use
3995@samp{etext} as a function name without encountering an error. The
3996@code{PROVIDE} keyword may be used to define a symbol, such as
3997@samp{etext}, only if it is referenced but not defined. The syntax is
3998@code{PROVIDE(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3999
4000Here is an example of using @code{PROVIDE} to define @samp{etext}:
4001@smallexample
4002SECTIONS
4003@{
4004 .text :
4005 @{
4006 *(.text)
4007 _etext = .;
4008 PROVIDE(etext = .);
4009 @}
4010@}
4011@end smallexample
4012
4013In this example, if the program defines @samp{_etext} (with a leading
4014underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error. If, on
4015the other hand, the program defines @samp{etext} (with no leading
4016underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
4017If the program references @samp{etext} but does not define it, the
4018linker will use the definition in the linker script.
4019
b0daac83
NC
4020Note - the @code{PROVIDE} directive considers a common symbol to be
4021defined, even though such a symbol could be combined with the symbol
4022that the @code{PROVIDE} would create. This is particularly important
4023when considering constructor and destructor list symbols such as
4024@samp{__CTOR_LIST__} as these are often defined as common symbols.
4025
7af8e998
L
4026@node PROVIDE_HIDDEN
4027@subsection PROVIDE_HIDDEN
4028@cindex PROVIDE_HIDDEN
4029Similar to @code{PROVIDE}. For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
4030hidden and won't be exported.
4031
73ae6183
NC
4032@node Source Code Reference
4033@subsection Source Code Reference
4034
4035Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
4036intuitive. In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to
4037a variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a
4038symbol that does not have a value.
4039
4040Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
4041transform names in the source code into different names when they are
4042stored in the symbol table. For example, Fortran compilers commonly
4043prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive @samp{name
4044mangling}. Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name
4045of a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
4046variable as it is defined in a linker script. For example in C a
4047linker script variable might be referred to as:
4048
4049@smallexample
4050 extern int foo;
4051@end smallexample
4052
4053But in the linker script it might be defined as:
4054
4055@smallexample
4056 _foo = 1000;
4057@end smallexample
4058
4059In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
4060transformation has taken place.
4061
4062When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
4063things happen. The first is that the compiler reserves enough space
4064in the program's memory to hold the @emph{value} of the symbol. The
4065second is that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol
4066table which holds the symbol's @emph{address}. ie the symbol table
4067contains the address of the block of memory holding the symbol's
4068value. So for example the following C declaration, at file scope:
4069
4070@smallexample
4071 int foo = 1000;
4072@end smallexample
4073
10bf6894 4074creates an entry called @samp{foo} in the symbol table. This entry
73ae6183
NC
4075holds the address of an @samp{int} sized block of memory where the
4076number 1000 is initially stored.
4077
4078When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
4079first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
4080memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
4081So:
4082
4083@smallexample
4084 foo = 1;
4085@end smallexample
4086
4087looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets the address
4088associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
4089address. Whereas:
4090
4091@smallexample
4092 int * a = & foo;
4093@end smallexample
4094
10bf6894 4095looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets its address
73ae6183
NC
4096and then copies this address into the block of memory associated with
4097the variable @samp{a}.
4098
4099Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
4100the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them. Thus they are
4101an address without a value. So for example the linker script definition:
4102
4103@smallexample
4104 foo = 1000;
4105@end smallexample
4106
4107creates an entry in the symbol table called @samp{foo} which holds
4108the address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
4109address 1000. This means that you cannot access the @emph{value} of a
4110linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
4111access the @emph{address} of a linker script defined symbol.
4112
4113Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source code
4114you should always take the address of the symbol, and never attempt to
4115use its value. For example suppose you want to copy the contents of a
4116section of memory called .ROM into a section called .FLASH and the
4117linker script contains these declarations:
4118
4119@smallexample
4120@group
4121 start_of_ROM = .ROM;
a5e406b5 4122 end_of_ROM = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM);
73ae6183
NC
4123 start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
4124@end group
4125@end smallexample
4126
4127Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
4128
4129@smallexample
4130@group
4131 extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
c0065db7 4132
73ae6183
NC
4133 memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
4134@end group
4135@end smallexample
4136
4137Note the use of the @samp{&} operators. These are correct.
5707d2ad
NC
4138Alternatively the symbols can be treated as the names of vectors or
4139arrays and then the code will again work as expected:
4140
4141@smallexample
4142@group
4143 extern char start_of_ROM[], end_of_ROM[], start_of_FLASH[];
4144
4145 memcpy (start_of_FLASH, start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM - start_of_ROM);
4146@end group
4147@end smallexample
4148
4149Note how using this method does not require the use of @samp{&}
4150operators.
73ae6183 4151
252b5132 4152@node SECTIONS
36f63dca 4153@section SECTIONS Command
252b5132
RH
4154@kindex SECTIONS
4155The @code{SECTIONS} command tells the linker how to map input sections
4156into output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
4157
4158The format of the @code{SECTIONS} command is:
4159@smallexample
4160SECTIONS
4161@{
4162 @var{sections-command}
4163 @var{sections-command}
4164 @dots{}
4165@}
4166@end smallexample
4167
4168Each @var{sections-command} may of be one of the following:
4169
4170@itemize @bullet
4171@item
4172an @code{ENTRY} command (@pxref{Entry Point,,Entry command})
4173@item
4174a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
4175@item
4176an output section description
4177@item
4178an overlay description
4179@end itemize
4180
4181The @code{ENTRY} command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
4182@code{SECTIONS} command for convenience in using the location counter in
4183those commands. This can also make the linker script easier to
4184understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
4185the layout of the output file.
4186
4187Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
4188below.
4189
4190If you do not use a @code{SECTIONS} command in your linker script, the
4191linker will place each input section into an identically named output
4192section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
4193input files. If all input sections are present in the first file, for
4194example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
4195in the first input file. The first section will be at address zero.
4196
4197@menu
4198* Output Section Description:: Output section description
4199* Output Section Name:: Output section name
4200* Output Section Address:: Output section address
4201* Input Section:: Input section description
4202* Output Section Data:: Output section data
4203* Output Section Keywords:: Output section keywords
4204* Output Section Discarding:: Output section discarding
4205* Output Section Attributes:: Output section attributes
4206* Overlay Description:: Overlay description
4207@end menu
4208
4209@node Output Section Description
36f63dca 4210@subsection Output Section Description
252b5132
RH
4211The full description of an output section looks like this:
4212@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 4213@group
7e7d5768 4214@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759 4215 [AT(@var{lma})]
1eec346e 4216 [ALIGN(@var{section_align}) | ALIGN_WITH_INPUT]
0c71d759
NC
4217 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4218 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
4219 @{
4220 @var{output-section-command}
4221 @var{output-section-command}
4222 @dots{}
abc9061b 4223 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}] [,]
252b5132
RH
4224@end group
4225@end smallexample
4226
4227Most output sections do not use most of the optional section attributes.
4228
4229The whitespace around @var{section} is required, so that the section
4230name is unambiguous. The colon and the curly braces are also required.
abc9061b
CC
4231The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fillexp} is used and
4232the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
252b5132
RH
4233The line breaks and other white space are optional.
4234
4235Each @var{output-section-command} may be one of the following:
4236
4237@itemize @bullet
4238@item
4239a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
4240@item
4241an input section description (@pxref{Input Section})
4242@item
4243data values to include directly (@pxref{Output Section Data})
4244@item
4245a special output section keyword (@pxref{Output Section Keywords})
4246@end itemize
4247
4248@node Output Section Name
36f63dca 4249@subsection Output Section Name
252b5132
RH
4250@cindex name, section
4251@cindex section name
4252The name of the output section is @var{section}. @var{section} must
4253meet the constraints of your output format. In formats which only
4254support a limited number of sections, such as @code{a.out}, the name
4255must be one of the names supported by the format (@code{a.out}, for
4256example, allows only @samp{.text}, @samp{.data} or @samp{.bss}). If the
4257output format supports any number of sections, but with numbers and not
4258names (as is the case for Oasys), the name should be supplied as a
4259quoted numeric string. A section name may consist of any sequence of
4260characters, but a name which contains any unusual characters such as
4261commas must be quoted.
4262
4263The output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} is special; @ref{Output Section
4264Discarding}.
4265
4266@node Output Section Address
2a16d82a 4267@subsection Output Section Address
252b5132
RH
4268@cindex address, section
4269@cindex section address
4270The @var{address} is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory
ea5cae92
NC
4271address) of the output section. This address is optional, but if it
4272is provided then the output address will be set exactly as specified.
4273
4274If the output address is not specified then one will be chosen for the
4275section, based on the heuristic below. This address will be adjusted
4276to fit the alignment requirement of the output section. The
4277alignment requirement is the strictest alignment of any input section
4278contained within the output section.
4279
4280The output section address heuristic is as follows:
4281
4282@itemize @bullet
4283@item
4284If an output memory @var{region} is set for the section then it
4285is added to this region and its address will be the next free address
4286in that region.
4287
4288@item
4289If the MEMORY command has been used to create a list of memory
4290regions then the first region which has attributes compatible with the
4291section is selected to contain it. The section's output address will
4292be the next free address in that region; @ref{MEMORY}.
4293
4294@item
4295If no memory regions were specified, or none match the section then
4296the output address will be based on the current value of the location
4297counter.
4298@end itemize
4299
4300@noindent
4301For example:
4302
252b5132
RH
4303@smallexample
4304.text . : @{ *(.text) @}
4305@end smallexample
ea5cae92 4306
252b5132
RH
4307@noindent
4308and
ea5cae92 4309
252b5132
RH
4310@smallexample
4311.text : @{ *(.text) @}
4312@end smallexample
ea5cae92 4313
252b5132
RH
4314@noindent
4315are subtly different. The first will set the address of the
4316@samp{.text} output section to the current value of the location
4317counter. The second will set it to the current value of the location
ea5cae92
NC
4318counter aligned to the strictest alignment of any of the @samp{.text}
4319input sections.
252b5132
RH
4320
4321The @var{address} may be an arbitrary expression; @ref{Expressions}.
4322For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
4323so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
4324do something like this:
4325@smallexample
4326.text ALIGN(0x10) : @{ *(.text) @}
4327@end smallexample
4328@noindent
4329This works because @code{ALIGN} returns the current location counter
4330aligned upward to the specified value.
4331
4332Specifying @var{address} for a section will change the value of the
6ce340f1
NC
4333location counter, provided that the section is non-empty. (Empty
4334sections are ignored).
252b5132
RH
4335
4336@node Input Section
36f63dca 4337@subsection Input Section Description
252b5132
RH
4338@cindex input sections
4339@cindex mapping input sections to output sections
4340The most common output section command is an input section description.
4341
4342The input section description is the most basic linker script operation.
4343You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out your program
4344in memory. You use input section descriptions to tell the linker how to
4345map the input files into your memory layout.
4346
4347@menu
4348* Input Section Basics:: Input section basics
4349* Input Section Wildcards:: Input section wildcard patterns
4350* Input Section Common:: Input section for common symbols
4351* Input Section Keep:: Input section and garbage collection
4352* Input Section Example:: Input section example
4353@end menu
4354
4355@node Input Section Basics
36f63dca 4356@subsubsection Input Section Basics
252b5132
RH
4357@cindex input section basics
4358An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
4359by a list of section names in parentheses.
4360
4361The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
4362describe further below (@pxref{Input Section Wildcards}).
4363
4364The most common input section description is to include all input
4365sections with a particular name in the output section. For example, to
4366include all input @samp{.text} sections, you would write:
4367@smallexample
4368*(.text)
4369@end smallexample
4370@noindent
18625d54 4371Here the @samp{*} is a wildcard which matches any file name. To exclude a list
8f1732fc 4372@cindex EXCLUDE_FILE
18625d54
CM
4373of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may be used to
4374match all files except the ones specified in the EXCLUDE_FILE list. For
4375example:
252b5132 4376@smallexample
8f1732fc
AB
4377EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) *(.ctors)
4378@end smallexample
4379@noindent
4380will cause all .ctors sections from all files except @file{crtend.o}
4381and @file{otherfile.o} to be included. The EXCLUDE_FILE can also be
4382placed inside the section list, for example:
4383@smallexample
b4346c09 4384*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
252b5132 4385@end smallexample
8f1732fc
AB
4386@noindent
4387The result of this is identically to the previous example. Supporting
4388two syntaxes for EXCLUDE_FILE is useful if the section list contains
4389more than one section, as described below.
252b5132
RH
4390
4391There are two ways to include more than one section:
4392@smallexample
4393*(.text .rdata)
4394*(.text) *(.rdata)
4395@end smallexample
4396@noindent
4397The difference between these is the order in which the @samp{.text} and
4398@samp{.rdata} input sections will appear in the output section. In the
b6bf44ba
AM
4399first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
4400they are found in the linker input. In the second example, all
252b5132
RH
4401@samp{.text} input sections will appear first, followed by all
4402@samp{.rdata} input sections.
4403
8f1732fc
AB
4404When using EXCLUDE_FILE with more than one section, if the exclusion
4405is within the section list then the exclusion only applies to the
4406immediately following section, for example:
a5bf7d4f
AB
4407@smallexample
4408*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .text .rdata)
4409@end smallexample
4410@noindent
4411will cause all @samp{.text} sections from all files except
4412@file{somefile.o} to be included, while all @samp{.rdata} sections
4413from all files, including @file{somefile.o}, will be included. To
4414exclude the @samp{.rdata} sections from @file{somefile.o} the example
8f1732fc 4415could be modified to:
a5bf7d4f
AB
4416@smallexample
4417*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .text EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .rdata)
4418@end smallexample
8f1732fc
AB
4419@noindent
4420Alternatively, placing the EXCLUDE_FILE outside of the section list,
4421before the input file selection, will cause the exclusion to apply for
4422all sections. Thus the previous example can be rewritten as:
4423@smallexample
4424EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) *(.text .rdata)
4425@end smallexample
a5bf7d4f 4426
252b5132
RH
4427You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular file.
4428You would do this if one or more of your files contain special data that
4429needs to be at a particular location in memory. For example:
4430@smallexample
4431data.o(.data)
4432@end smallexample
4433
ae17ab41
CM
4434To refine the sections that are included based on the section flags
4435of an input section, INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS may be used.
4436
4437Here is a simple example for using Section header flags for ELF sections:
4438
4439@smallexample
4440@group
4441SECTIONS @{
4442 .text : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (SHF_MERGE & SHF_STRINGS) *(.text) @}
4443 .text2 : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (!SHF_WRITE) *(.text) @}
4444@}
4445@end group
4446@end smallexample
4447
4448In this example, the output section @samp{.text} will be comprised of any
4449input section matching the name *(.text) whose section header flags
4450@code{SHF_MERGE} and @code{SHF_STRINGS} are set. The output section
4451@samp{.text2} will be comprised of any input section matching the name *(.text)
4452whose section header flag @code{SHF_WRITE} is clear.
4453
967928e9
AM
4454You can also specify files within archives by writing a pattern
4455matching the archive, a colon, then the pattern matching the file,
4456with no whitespace around the colon.
4457
4458@table @samp
4459@item archive:file
4460matches file within archive
4461@item archive:
4462matches the whole archive
4463@item :file
4464matches file but not one in an archive
4465@end table
4466
4467Either one or both of @samp{archive} and @samp{file} can contain shell
4468wildcards. On DOS based file systems, the linker will assume that a
4469single letter followed by a colon is a drive specifier, so
4470@samp{c:myfile.o} is a simple file specification, not @samp{myfile.o}
4471within an archive called @samp{c}. @samp{archive:file} filespecs may
4472also be used within an @code{EXCLUDE_FILE} list, but may not appear in
4473other linker script contexts. For instance, you cannot extract a file
4474from an archive by using @samp{archive:file} in an @code{INPUT}
4475command.
4476
252b5132
RH
4477If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections in
4478the input file will be included in the output section. This is not
4479commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion. For example:
4480@smallexample
4481data.o
4482@end smallexample
4483
967928e9
AM
4484When you use a file name which is not an @samp{archive:file} specifier
4485and does not contain any wild card
252b5132
RH
4486characters, the linker will first see if you also specified the file
4487name on the linker command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. If you
4488did not, the linker will attempt to open the file as an input file, as
4489though it appeared on the command line. Note that this differs from an
4490@code{INPUT} command, because the linker will not search for the file in
4491the archive search path.
4492
4493@node Input Section Wildcards
36f63dca 4494@subsubsection Input Section Wildcard Patterns
252b5132
RH
4495@cindex input section wildcards
4496@cindex wildcard file name patterns
4497@cindex file name wildcard patterns
4498@cindex section name wildcard patterns
4499In an input section description, either the file name or the section
4500name or both may be wildcard patterns.
4501
4502The file name of @samp{*} seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
4503pattern for the file name.
4504
4505The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
4506
4507@table @samp
4508@item *
4509matches any number of characters
4510@item ?
4511matches any single character
4512@item [@var{chars}]
4513matches a single instance of any of the @var{chars}; the @samp{-}
4514character may be used to specify a range of characters, as in
4515@samp{[a-z]} to match any lower case letter
4516@item \
4517quotes the following character
4518@end table
4519
4520When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
4521will not match a @samp{/} character (used to separate directory names on
4522Unix). A pattern consisting of a single @samp{*} character is an
4523exception; it will always match any file name, whether it contains a
4524@samp{/} or not. In a section name, the wildcard characters will match
4525a @samp{/} character.
4526
4527File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
4528specified on the command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. The linker
4529does not search directories to expand wildcards.
4530
4531If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file name
4532appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the linker
4533will use the first match in the linker script. For example, this
4534sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
4535@file{data.o} rule will not be used:
4536@smallexample
4537.data : @{ *(.data) @}
4538.data1 : @{ data.o(.data) @}
4539@end smallexample
4540
bcaa7b3e 4541@cindex SORT_BY_NAME
252b5132
RH
4542Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by wildcards
4543in the order in which they are seen during the link. You can change
bcaa7b3e
L
4544this by using the @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword, which appears before a wildcard
4545pattern in parentheses (e.g., @code{SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)}). When the
4546@code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or sections
252b5132
RH
4547into ascending order by name before placing them in the output file.
4548
bcaa7b3e
L
4549@cindex SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT
4550@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4551difference is @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} will sort sections into
1ae5c3ae 4552descending order by alignment before placing them in the output file.
ee83b8a6
NC
4553Larger alignments are placed before smaller alignments in order to
4554reduce the amount of padding necessary.
bcaa7b3e 4555
02ecc8e9
L
4556@cindex SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY
4557@code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4558difference is @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} will sort sections into
4559ascending order by numerical value of the GCC init_priority attribute
4560encoded in the section name before placing them in the output file.
4561
bcaa7b3e
L
4562@cindex SORT
4563@code{SORT} is an alias for @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
4564
4565When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script, there
4566can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
4567
4568@enumerate
4569@item
4570@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
1ae5c3ae 4571It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment if two
bcaa7b3e
L
4572sections have the same name.
4573@item
4574@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
1ae5c3ae 4575It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name if two
bcaa7b3e
L
4576sections have the same alignment.
4577@item
c0065db7 4578@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)) is
bcaa7b3e
L
4579treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern).
4580@item
4581@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern))
4582is treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern).
4583@item
4584All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
4585@end enumerate
4586
a05a5b64 4587When both command-line section sorting option and linker script
bcaa7b3e 4588section sorting command are used, section sorting command always
a05a5b64 4589takes precedence over the command-line option.
bcaa7b3e
L
4590
4591If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
a05a5b64 4592command-line option will make the section sorting command to be
bcaa7b3e
L
4593treated as nested sorting command.
4594
4595@enumerate
4596@item
4597@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern ) with
4598@option{--sort-sections alignment} is equivalent to
4599@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4600@item
4601@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern) with
4602@option{--sort-section name} is equivalent to
4603@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4604@end enumerate
4605
4606If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
a05a5b64 4607command-line option will be ignored.
bcaa7b3e 4608
eda680f8 4609@cindex SORT_NONE
a05a5b64 4610@code{SORT_NONE} disables section sorting by ignoring the command-line
eda680f8
L
4611section sorting option.
4612
252b5132
RH
4613If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use the
4614@samp{-M} linker option to generate a map file. The map file shows
4615precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
4616
4617This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
4618files. This linker script directs the linker to place all @samp{.text}
4619sections in @samp{.text} and all @samp{.bss} sections in @samp{.bss}.
4620The linker will place the @samp{.data} section from all files beginning
4621with an upper case character in @samp{.DATA}; for all other files, the
4622linker will place the @samp{.data} section in @samp{.data}.
4623@smallexample
4624@group
4625SECTIONS @{
4626 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
4627 .DATA : @{ [A-Z]*(.data) @}
4628 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4629 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
4630@}
4631@end group
4632@end smallexample
4633
4634@node Input Section Common
36f63dca 4635@subsubsection Input Section for Common Symbols
252b5132
RH
4636@cindex common symbol placement
4637@cindex uninitialized data placement
4638A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
4639file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section. The
4640linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
4641named @samp{COMMON}.
4642
4643You may use file names with the @samp{COMMON} section just as with any
4644other input sections. You can use this to place common symbols from a
4645particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
4646input files are placed in another section.
4647
4648In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
4649@samp{.bss} section in the output file. For example:
4650@smallexample
4651.bss @{ *(.bss) *(COMMON) @}
4652@end smallexample
4653
4654@cindex scommon section
4655@cindex small common symbols
4656Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol. For
4657example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard common
4658symbols and small common symbols. In this case, the linker will use a
4659different special section name for other types of common symbols. In
4660the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses @samp{COMMON} for standard common
4661symbols and @samp{.scommon} for small common symbols. This permits you
4662to map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
4663locations.
4664
4665@cindex [COMMON]
4666You will sometimes see @samp{[COMMON]} in old linker scripts. This
4667notation is now considered obsolete. It is equivalent to
4668@samp{*(COMMON)}.
4669
4670@node Input Section Keep
36f63dca 4671@subsubsection Input Section and Garbage Collection
252b5132
RH
4672@cindex KEEP
4673@cindex garbage collection
4674When link-time garbage collection is in use (@samp{--gc-sections}),
a1ab1d2a 4675it is often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.
252b5132
RH
4676This is accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry
4677with @code{KEEP()}, as in @code{KEEP(*(.init))} or
bcaa7b3e 4678@code{KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))}.
252b5132
RH
4679
4680@node Input Section Example
36f63dca 4681@subsubsection Input Section Example
252b5132
RH
4682The following example is a complete linker script. It tells the linker
4683to read all of the sections from file @file{all.o} and place them at the
4684start of output section @samp{outputa} which starts at location
4685@samp{0x10000}. All of section @samp{.input1} from file @file{foo.o}
4686follows immediately, in the same output section. All of section
4687@samp{.input2} from @file{foo.o} goes into output section
4688@samp{outputb}, followed by section @samp{.input1} from @file{foo1.o}.
4689All of the remaining @samp{.input1} and @samp{.input2} sections from any
4690files are written to output section @samp{outputc}.
4691
4692@smallexample
4693@group
4694SECTIONS @{
4695 outputa 0x10000 :
4696 @{
4697 all.o
4698 foo.o (.input1)
4699 @}
36f63dca
NC
4700@end group
4701@group
252b5132
RH
4702 outputb :
4703 @{
4704 foo.o (.input2)
4705 foo1.o (.input1)
4706 @}
36f63dca
NC
4707@end group
4708@group
252b5132
RH
4709 outputc :
4710 @{
4711 *(.input1)
4712 *(.input2)
4713 @}
4714@}
4715@end group
a1ab1d2a 4716@end smallexample
252b5132 4717
cbd0eecf
L
4718If an output section's name is the same as the input section's name
4719and is representable as a C identifier, then the linker will
4720automatically @pxref{PROVIDE} two symbols: __start_SECNAME and
4721__stop_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the section. These
4722indicate the start address and end address of the output section
4723respectively. Note: most section names are not representable as
4724C identifiers because they contain a @samp{.} character.
4725
252b5132 4726@node Output Section Data
36f63dca 4727@subsection Output Section Data
252b5132
RH
4728@cindex data
4729@cindex section data
4730@cindex output section data
4731@kindex BYTE(@var{expression})
4732@kindex SHORT(@var{expression})
4733@kindex LONG(@var{expression})
4734@kindex QUAD(@var{expression})
4735@kindex SQUAD(@var{expression})
4736You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
4737@code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, @code{QUAD}, or @code{SQUAD} as
4738an output section command. Each keyword is followed by an expression in
4739parentheses providing the value to store (@pxref{Expressions}). The
4740value of the expression is stored at the current value of the location
4741counter.
4742
4743The @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, and @code{QUAD} commands
4744store one, two, four, and eight bytes (respectively). After storing the
4745bytes, the location counter is incremented by the number of bytes
4746stored.
4747
4748For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte value
4749of the symbol @samp{addr}:
4750@smallexample
4751BYTE(1)
4752LONG(addr)
4753@end smallexample
4754
4755When using a 64 bit host or target, @code{QUAD} and @code{SQUAD} are the
4756same; they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value. When both host and
4757target are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits. In this case
4758@code{QUAD} stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and
4759@code{SQUAD} stores a 32 bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
4760
4761If the object file format of the output file has an explicit endianness,
4762which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that endianness.
4763When the object file format does not have an explicit endianness, as is
4764true of, for example, S-records, the value will be stored in the
4765endianness of the first input object file.
4766
36f63dca 4767Note---these commands only work inside a section description and not
2b5fc1f5
NC
4768between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
4769@smallexample
4770SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) @}@ LONG(1) .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4771@end smallexample
4772whereas this will work:
4773@smallexample
4774SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) ; LONG(1) @}@ .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4775@end smallexample
4776
252b5132
RH
4777@kindex FILL(@var{expression})
4778@cindex holes, filling
4779@cindex unspecified memory
4780You may use the @code{FILL} command to set the fill pattern for the
4781current section. It is followed by an expression in parentheses. Any
4782otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
4783gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
a139d329 4784with the value of the expression, repeated as
252b5132
RH
4785necessary. A @code{FILL} statement covers memory locations after the
4786point at which it occurs in the section definition; by including more
4787than one @code{FILL} statement, you can have different fill patterns in
4788different parts of an output section.
4789
4790This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
563e308f 4791value @samp{0x90}:
252b5132 4792@smallexample
563e308f 4793FILL(0x90909090)
252b5132
RH
4794@end smallexample
4795
4796The @code{FILL} command is similar to the @samp{=@var{fillexp}} output
9673c93c 4797section attribute, but it only affects the
252b5132
RH
4798part of the section following the @code{FILL} command, rather than the
4799entire section. If both are used, the @code{FILL} command takes
9673c93c 4800precedence. @xref{Output Section Fill}, for details on the fill
a139d329 4801expression.
252b5132
RH
4802
4803@node Output Section Keywords
36f63dca 4804@subsection Output Section Keywords
252b5132
RH
4805There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
4806commands.
4807
4808@table @code
4809@kindex CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4810@cindex input filename symbols
4811@cindex filename symbols
4812@item CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4813The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input file.
4814The name of each symbol will be the name of the corresponding input
4815file. The section of each symbol will be the output section in which
4816the @code{CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS} command appears.
4817
4818This is conventional for the a.out object file format. It is not
4819normally used for any other object file format.
4820
4821@kindex CONSTRUCTORS
4822@cindex C++ constructors, arranging in link
4823@cindex constructors, arranging in link
4824@item CONSTRUCTORS
4825When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
4826unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
4827destructors. When linking object file formats which do not support
4828arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
4829automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by name.
4830For these object file formats, the @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command tells the
4831linker to place constructor information in the output section where the
4832@code{CONSTRUCTORS} command appears. The @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command is
4833ignored for other object file formats.
4834
4835The symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_LIST__}} marks the start of the global
7e69709c
AM
4836constructors, and the symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_END__}} marks the end.
4837Similarly, @w{@code{__DTOR_LIST__}} and @w{@code{__DTOR_END__}} mark
4838the start and end of the global destructors. The
252b5132
RH
4839first word in the list is the number of entries, followed by the address
4840of each constructor or destructor, followed by a zero word. The
4841compiler must arrange to actually run the code. For these object file
4842formats @sc{gnu} C++ normally calls constructors from a subroutine
4843@code{__main}; a call to @code{__main} is automatically inserted into
4844the startup code for @code{main}. @sc{gnu} C++ normally runs
4845destructors either by using @code{atexit}, or directly from the function
4846@code{exit}.
4847
4848For object file formats such as @code{COFF} or @code{ELF} which support
4849arbitrary section names, @sc{gnu} C++ will normally arrange to put the
4850addresses of global constructors and destructors into the @code{.ctors}
4851and @code{.dtors} sections. Placing the following sequence into your
4852linker script will build the sort of table which the @sc{gnu} C++
4853runtime code expects to see.
4854
4855@smallexample
4856 __CTOR_LIST__ = .;
4857 LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4858 *(.ctors)
4859 LONG(0)
4860 __CTOR_END__ = .;
4861 __DTOR_LIST__ = .;
4862 LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4863 *(.dtors)
4864 LONG(0)
4865 __DTOR_END__ = .;
4866@end smallexample
4867
4868If you are using the @sc{gnu} C++ support for initialization priority,
4869which provides some control over the order in which global constructors
4870are run, you must sort the constructors at link time to ensure that they
4871are executed in the correct order. When using the @code{CONSTRUCTORS}
bcaa7b3e
L
4872command, use @samp{SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)} instead. When using the
4873@code{.ctors} and @code{.dtors} sections, use @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))} and
4874@samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))} instead of just @samp{*(.ctors)} and
252b5132
RH
4875@samp{*(.dtors)}.
4876
4877Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues automatically,
4878and you will not need to concern yourself with them. However, you may
4879need to consider this if you are using C++ and writing your own linker
4880scripts.
4881
4882@end table
4883
4884@node Output Section Discarding
36f63dca 4885@subsection Output Section Discarding
252b5132
RH
4886@cindex discarding sections
4887@cindex sections, discarding
4888@cindex removing sections
2edab91c
AM
4889The linker will not normally create output sections with no contents.
4890This is for convenience when referring to input sections that may or
4891may not be present in any of the input files. For example:
252b5132 4892@smallexample
49c13adb 4893.foo : @{ *(.foo) @}
252b5132
RH
4894@end smallexample
4895@noindent
4896will only create a @samp{.foo} section in the output file if there is a
74541ad4
AM
4897@samp{.foo} section in at least one input file, and if the input
4898sections are not all empty. Other link script directives that allocate
2edab91c
AM
4899space in an output section will also create the output section. So
4900too will assignments to dot even if the assignment does not create
4901space, except for @samp{. = 0}, @samp{. = . + 0}, @samp{. = sym},
4902@samp{. = . + sym} and @samp{. = ALIGN (. != 0, expr, 1)} when
4903@samp{sym} is an absolute symbol of value 0 defined in the script.
4904This allows you to force output of an empty section with @samp{. = .}.
74541ad4 4905
a0976ea4 4906The linker will ignore address assignments (@pxref{Output Section Address})
74541ad4
AM
4907on discarded output sections, except when the linker script defines
4908symbols in the output section. In that case the linker will obey
a0976ea4
AM
4909the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
4910section is discarded.
252b5132
RH
4911
4912@cindex /DISCARD/
4913The special output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} may be used to discard
4914input sections. Any input sections which are assigned to an output
4915section named @samp{/DISCARD/} are not included in the output file.
4916
4917@node Output Section Attributes
36f63dca 4918@subsection Output Section Attributes
252b5132
RH
4919@cindex output section attributes
4920We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
4921like this:
0c71d759 4922
252b5132 4923@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 4924@group
7e7d5768 4925@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759
NC
4926 [AT(@var{lma})]
4927 [ALIGN(@var{section_align})]
4928 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4929 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
4930 @{
4931 @var{output-section-command}
4932 @var{output-section-command}
4933 @dots{}
562d3460 4934 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
252b5132
RH
4935@end group
4936@end smallexample
0c71d759 4937
252b5132
RH
4938We've already described @var{section}, @var{address}, and
4939@var{output-section-command}. In this section we will describe the
4940remaining section attributes.
4941
a1ab1d2a 4942@menu
252b5132
RH
4943* Output Section Type:: Output section type
4944* Output Section LMA:: Output section LMA
bbf115d3 4945* Forced Output Alignment:: Forced Output Alignment
7e7d5768 4946* Forced Input Alignment:: Forced Input Alignment
0c71d759 4947* Output Section Constraint:: Output section constraint
252b5132
RH
4948* Output Section Region:: Output section region
4949* Output Section Phdr:: Output section phdr
4950* Output Section Fill:: Output section fill
4951@end menu
4952
4953@node Output Section Type
36f63dca 4954@subsubsection Output Section Type
252b5132
RH
4955Each output section may have a type. The type is a keyword in
4956parentheses. The following types are defined:
4957
4958@table @code
4959@item NOLOAD
4960The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not be
4961loaded into memory when the program is run.
4962@item DSECT
4963@itemx COPY
4964@itemx INFO
4965@itemx OVERLAY
4966These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
4967rarely used. They all have the same effect: the section should be
4968marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
4969section when the program is run.
4970@end table
4971
4972@kindex NOLOAD
4973@cindex prevent unnecessary loading
4974@cindex loading, preventing
4975The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
4976the input sections which map into it. You can override this by using
4977the section type. For example, in the script sample below, the
4978@samp{ROM} section is addressed at memory location @samp{0} and does not
2e76e85a 4979need to be loaded when the program is run.
252b5132
RH
4980@smallexample
4981@group
4982SECTIONS @{
4983 ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : @{ @dots{} @}
4984 @dots{}
4985@}
4986@end group
4987@end smallexample
4988
4989@node Output Section LMA
36f63dca 4990@subsubsection Output Section LMA
562d3460 4991@kindex AT>@var{lma_region}
252b5132
RH
4992@kindex AT(@var{lma})
4993@cindex load address
4994@cindex section load address
4995Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
ea5cae92
NC
4996@ref{Basic Script Concepts}. The virtual address is specified by the
4997@pxref{Output Section Address} described earlier. The load address is
4998specified by the @code{AT} or @code{AT>} keywords. Specifying a load
4999address is optional.
6bdafbeb 5000
ea5cae92
NC
5001The @code{AT} keyword takes an expression as an argument. This
5002specifies the exact load address of the section. The @code{AT>} keyword
5003takes the name of a memory region as an argument. @xref{MEMORY}. The
5004load address of the section is set to the next free address in the
5005region, aligned to the section's alignment requirements.
dc0b6aa0
AM
5006
5007If neither @code{AT} nor @code{AT>} is specified for an allocatable
ea5cae92
NC
5008section, the linker will use the following heuristic to determine the
5009load address:
5010
5011@itemize @bullet
5012@item
5013If the section has a specific VMA address, then this is used as
5014the LMA address as well.
5015
5016@item
5017If the section is not allocatable then its LMA is set to its VMA.
5018
5019@item
5020Otherwise if a memory region can be found that is compatible
5021with the current section, and this region contains at least one
5022section, then the LMA is set so the difference between the
5023VMA and LMA is the same as the difference between the VMA and LMA of
5024the last section in the located region.
5025
5026@item
5027If no memory regions have been declared then a default region
5028that covers the entire address space is used in the previous step.
5029
5030@item
5031If no suitable region could be found, or there was no previous
5032section then the LMA is set equal to the VMA.
5033@end itemize
252b5132
RH
5034
5035@cindex ROM initialized data
5036@cindex initialized data in ROM
5037This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image. For
5038example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
5039called @samp{.text}, which starts at @code{0x1000}, one called
5040@samp{.mdata}, which is loaded at the end of the @samp{.text} section
5041even though its VMA is @code{0x2000}, and one called @samp{.bss} to hold
5042uninitialized data at address @code{0x3000}. The symbol @code{_data} is
5043defined with the value @code{0x2000}, which shows that the location
5044counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
5045
5046@smallexample
5047@group
5048SECTIONS
5049 @{
5050 .text 0x1000 : @{ *(.text) _etext = . ; @}
a1ab1d2a 5051 .mdata 0x2000 :
252b5132
RH
5052 AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
5053 @{ _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ; @}
5054 .bss 0x3000 :
5055 @{ _bstart = . ; *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;@}
5056@}
5057@end group
5058@end smallexample
5059
5060The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated with
5061this linker script would include something like the following, to copy
5062the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address. Notice
5063how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the linker
5064script.
5065
5066@smallexample
5067@group
5068extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
5069char *src = &_etext;
5070char *dst = &_data;
5071
ea5cae92
NC
5072/* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */
5073while (dst < &_edata)
252b5132 5074 *dst++ = *src++;
252b5132 5075
ea5cae92 5076/* Zero bss. */
252b5132
RH
5077for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
5078 *dst = 0;
5079@end group
5080@end smallexample
5081
bbf115d3
L
5082@node Forced Output Alignment
5083@subsubsection Forced Output Alignment
5084@kindex ALIGN(@var{section_align})
5085@cindex forcing output section alignment
5086@cindex output section alignment
1eec346e 5087You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN. As an
13075d04
SH
5088alternative you can enforce that the difference between the VMA and LMA remains
5089intact throughout this output section with the ALIGN_WITH_INPUT attribute.
bbf115d3 5090
7e7d5768
AM
5091@node Forced Input Alignment
5092@subsubsection Forced Input Alignment
5093@kindex SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})
5094@cindex forcing input section alignment
5095@cindex input section alignment
5096You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
5097SUBALIGN. The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
5098sections, whether larger or smaller.
5099
0c71d759
NC
5100@node Output Section Constraint
5101@subsubsection Output Section Constraint
5102@kindex ONLY_IF_RO
5103@kindex ONLY_IF_RW
5104@cindex constraints on output sections
5105You can specify that an output section should only be created if all
5106of its input sections are read-only or all of its input sections are
5107read-write by using the keyword @code{ONLY_IF_RO} and
5108@code{ONLY_IF_RW} respectively.
5109
252b5132 5110@node Output Section Region
36f63dca 5111@subsubsection Output Section Region
252b5132
RH
5112@kindex >@var{region}
5113@cindex section, assigning to memory region
5114@cindex memory regions and sections
5115You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
5116using @samp{>@var{region}}. @xref{MEMORY}.
5117
5118Here is a simple example:
5119@smallexample
5120@group
5121MEMORY @{ rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 @}
5122SECTIONS @{ ROM : @{ *(.text) @} >rom @}
5123@end group
5124@end smallexample
5125
5126@node Output Section Phdr
36f63dca 5127@subsubsection Output Section Phdr
252b5132
RH
5128@kindex :@var{phdr}
5129@cindex section, assigning to program header
5130@cindex program headers and sections
5131You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
5132using @samp{:@var{phdr}}. @xref{PHDRS}. If a section is assigned to
5133one or more segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be
5134assigned to those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly
5135@code{:@var{phdr}} modifier. You can use @code{:NONE} to tell the
5136linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
5137
5138Here is a simple example:
5139@smallexample
5140@group
5141PHDRS @{ text PT_LOAD ; @}
5142SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text @}
5143@end group
5144@end smallexample
5145
5146@node Output Section Fill
36f63dca 5147@subsubsection Output Section Fill
252b5132
RH
5148@kindex =@var{fillexp}
5149@cindex section fill pattern
5150@cindex fill pattern, entire section
5151You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using
5152@samp{=@var{fillexp}}. @var{fillexp} is an expression
5153(@pxref{Expressions}). Any otherwise unspecified regions of memory
5154within the output section (for example, gaps left due to the required
a139d329
AM
5155alignment of input sections) will be filled with the value, repeated as
5156necessary. If the fill expression is a simple hex number, ie. a string
9673c93c 5157of hex digit starting with @samp{0x} and without a trailing @samp{k} or @samp{M}, then
a139d329
AM
5158an arbitrarily long sequence of hex digits can be used to specify the
5159fill pattern; Leading zeros become part of the pattern too. For all
9673c93c 5160other cases, including extra parentheses or a unary @code{+}, the fill
a139d329
AM
5161pattern is the four least significant bytes of the value of the
5162expression. In all cases, the number is big-endian.
252b5132
RH
5163
5164You can also change the fill value with a @code{FILL} command in the
9673c93c 5165output section commands; (@pxref{Output Section Data}).
252b5132
RH
5166
5167Here is a simple example:
5168@smallexample
5169@group
563e308f 5170SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} =0x90909090 @}
252b5132
RH
5171@end group
5172@end smallexample
5173
5174@node Overlay Description
36f63dca 5175@subsection Overlay Description
252b5132
RH
5176@kindex OVERLAY
5177@cindex overlays
5178An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
5179are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
5180the same memory address. At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
5181copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
5182required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits. This approach
5183can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
5184than another.
5185
5186Overlays are described using the @code{OVERLAY} command. The
5187@code{OVERLAY} command is used within a @code{SECTIONS} command, like an
5188output section description. The full syntax of the @code{OVERLAY}
5189command is as follows:
5190@smallexample
5191@group
5192OVERLAY [@var{start}] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( @var{ldaddr} )]
5193 @{
5194 @var{secname1}
5195 @{
5196 @var{output-section-command}
5197 @var{output-section-command}
5198 @dots{}
5199 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
5200 @var{secname2}
5201 @{
5202 @var{output-section-command}
5203 @var{output-section-command}
5204 @dots{}
5205 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
5206 @dots{}
abc9061b 5207 @} [>@var{region}] [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}] [,]
252b5132
RH
5208@end group
5209@end smallexample
5210
5211Everything is optional except @code{OVERLAY} (a keyword), and each
5212section must have a name (@var{secname1} and @var{secname2} above). The
5213section definitions within the @code{OVERLAY} construct are identical to
11e7fd74 5214those within the general @code{SECTIONS} construct (@pxref{SECTIONS}),
252b5132
RH
5215except that no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for
5216sections within an @code{OVERLAY}.
5217
abc9061b
CC
5218The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fill} is used and
5219the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
5220
252b5132
RH
5221The sections are all defined with the same starting address. The load
5222addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are consecutive in
5223memory starting at the load address used for the @code{OVERLAY} as a
5224whole (as with normal section definitions, the load address is optional,
5225and defaults to the start address; the start address is also optional,
5226and defaults to the current value of the location counter).
5227
56dd11f0
NC
5228If the @code{NOCROSSREFS} keyword is used, and there are any
5229references among the sections, the linker will report an error. Since
5230the sections all run at the same address, it normally does not make
5231sense for one section to refer directly to another.
5232@xref{Miscellaneous Commands, NOCROSSREFS}.
252b5132
RH
5233
5234For each section within the @code{OVERLAY}, the linker automatically
34711ca3 5235provides two symbols. The symbol @code{__load_start_@var{secname}} is
252b5132
RH
5236defined as the starting load address of the section. The symbol
5237@code{__load_stop_@var{secname}} is defined as the final load address of
5238the section. Any characters within @var{secname} which are not legal
5239within C identifiers are removed. C (or assembler) code may use these
5240symbols to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
5241
5242At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set to
5243the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest section.
5244
5245Here is an example. Remember that this would appear inside a
5246@code{SECTIONS} construct.
5247@smallexample
5248@group
5249 OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
5250 @{
5251 .text0 @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
5252 .text1 @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
5253 @}
5254@end group
5255@end smallexample
5256@noindent
5257This will define both @samp{.text0} and @samp{.text1} to start at
5258address 0x1000. @samp{.text0} will be loaded at address 0x4000, and
5259@samp{.text1} will be loaded immediately after @samp{.text0}. The
34711ca3 5260following symbols will be defined if referenced: @code{__load_start_text0},
252b5132
RH
5261@code{__load_stop_text0}, @code{__load_start_text1},
5262@code{__load_stop_text1}.
5263
5264C code to copy overlay @code{.text1} into the overlay area might look
5265like the following.
5266
5267@smallexample
5268@group
5269 extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
5270 memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
5271 &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
5272@end group
5273@end smallexample
5274
5275Note that the @code{OVERLAY} command is just syntactic sugar, since
5276everything it does can be done using the more basic commands. The above
5277example could have been written identically as follows.
5278
5279@smallexample
5280@group
5281 .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
5282 PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
5283 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
252b5132 5284 .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
5285 PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
5286 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
252b5132
RH
5287 . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
5288@end group
5289@end smallexample
5290
5291@node MEMORY
36f63dca 5292@section MEMORY Command
252b5132
RH
5293@kindex MEMORY
5294@cindex memory regions
5295@cindex regions of memory
5296@cindex allocating memory
5297@cindex discontinuous memory
5298The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
5299memory. You can override this by using the @code{MEMORY} command.
5300
5301The @code{MEMORY} command describes the location and size of blocks of
5302memory in the target. You can use it to describe which memory regions
5303may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid. You
5304can then assign sections to particular memory regions. The linker will
5305set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
5306regions that become too full. The linker will not shuffle sections
5307around to fit into the available regions.
5308
127fcdff
AB
5309A linker script may contain many uses of the @code{MEMORY} command,
5310however, all memory blocks defined are treated as if they were
5311specified inside a single @code{MEMORY} command. The syntax for
5312@code{MEMORY} is:
252b5132
RH
5313@smallexample
5314@group
a1ab1d2a 5315MEMORY
252b5132
RH
5316 @{
5317 @var{name} [(@var{attr})] : ORIGIN = @var{origin}, LENGTH = @var{len}
5318 @dots{}
5319 @}
5320@end group
5321@end smallexample
5322
5323The @var{name} is a name used in the linker script to refer to the
5324region. The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.
5325Region names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5326with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each memory region
4a93e180
NC
5327must have a distinct name within the @code{MEMORY} command. However you can
5328add later alias names to existing memory regions with the @ref{REGION_ALIAS}
9d5777a3 5329command.
252b5132
RH
5330
5331@cindex memory region attributes
5332The @var{attr} string is an optional list of attributes that specify
5333whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
5334not explicitly mapped in the linker script. As described in
5335@ref{SECTIONS}, if you do not specify an output section for some input
5336section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
5337the input section. If you define region attributes, the linker will use
5338them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
5339
5340The @var{attr} string must consist only of the following characters:
5341@table @samp
5342@item R
5343Read-only section
5344@item W
5345Read/write section
5346@item X
5347Executable section
5348@item A
5349Allocatable section
5350@item I
5351Initialized section
5352@item L
5353Same as @samp{I}
5354@item !
c09e9a8c 5355Invert the sense of any of the attributes that follow
252b5132
RH
5356@end table
5357
5358If a unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
5359@samp{!}, it will be placed in the memory region. The @samp{!}
5360attribute reverses this test, so that an unmapped section will be placed
5361in the memory region only if it does not match any of the listed
5362attributes.
5363
5364@kindex ORIGIN =
5365@kindex o =
5366@kindex org =
9cd6d51a
NC
5367The @var{origin} is an numerical expression for the start address of
5368the memory region. The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
5369cannot involve any symbols. The keyword @code{ORIGIN} may be
5370abbreviated to @code{org} or @code{o} (but not, for example,
5371@code{ORG}).
252b5132
RH
5372
5373@kindex LENGTH =
5374@kindex len =
5375@kindex l =
5376The @var{len} is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory
5377region. As with the @var{origin} expression, the expression must
9cd6d51a
NC
5378be numerical only and must evaluate to a constant. The keyword
5379@code{LENGTH} may be abbreviated to @code{len} or @code{l}.
252b5132
RH
5380
5381In the following example, we specify that there are two memory regions
5382available for allocation: one starting at @samp{0} for 256 kilobytes,
5383and the other starting at @samp{0x40000000} for four megabytes. The
5384linker will place into the @samp{rom} memory region every section which
5385is not explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only
5386or executable. The linker will place other sections which are not
5387explicitly mapped into a memory region into the @samp{ram} memory
5388region.
5389
5390@smallexample
5391@group
a1ab1d2a 5392MEMORY
252b5132
RH
5393 @{
5394 rom (rx) : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
5395 ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
5396 @}
5397@end group
5398@end smallexample
5399
5400Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
5401specific output sections into that memory region by using the
5402@samp{>@var{region}} output section attribute. For example, if you have
5403a memory region named @samp{mem}, you would use @samp{>mem} in the
5404output section definition. @xref{Output Section Region}. If no address
5405was specified for the output section, the linker will set the address to
5406the next available address within the memory region. If the combined
5407output sections directed to a memory region are too large for the
5408region, the linker will issue an error message.
5409
3ec57632 5410It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
c0065db7 5411expression via the @code{ORIGIN(@var{memory})} and
3ec57632
NC
5412@code{LENGTH(@var{memory})} functions:
5413
5414@smallexample
5415@group
c0065db7 5416 _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
3ec57632
NC
5417@end group
5418@end smallexample
5419
252b5132
RH
5420@node PHDRS
5421@section PHDRS Command
5422@kindex PHDRS
5423@cindex program headers
5424@cindex ELF program headers
5425@cindex program segments
5426@cindex segments, ELF
5427The ELF object file format uses @dfn{program headers}, also knows as
5428@dfn{segments}. The program headers describe how the program should be
5429loaded into memory. You can print them out by using the @code{objdump}
5430program with the @samp{-p} option.
5431
5432When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
5433reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
5434program. This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
5435This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
5436interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
5437
5438The linker will create reasonable program headers by default. However,
5439in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
5440precisely. You may use the @code{PHDRS} command for this purpose. When
5441the linker sees the @code{PHDRS} command in the linker script, it will
5442not create any program headers other than the ones specified.
5443
5444The linker only pays attention to the @code{PHDRS} command when
5445generating an ELF output file. In other cases, the linker will simply
5446ignore @code{PHDRS}.
5447
5448This is the syntax of the @code{PHDRS} command. The words @code{PHDRS},
5449@code{FILEHDR}, @code{AT}, and @code{FLAGS} are keywords.
5450
5451@smallexample
5452@group
5453PHDRS
5454@{
5455 @var{name} @var{type} [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( @var{address} ) ]
5456 [ FLAGS ( @var{flags} ) ] ;
5457@}
5458@end group
5459@end smallexample
5460
5461The @var{name} is used only for reference in the @code{SECTIONS} command
5462of the linker script. It is not put into the output file. Program
5463header names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5464with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each program header
5c1a3f0f
NS
5465must have a distinct name. The headers are processed in order and it
5466is usual for them to map to sections in ascending load address order.
252b5132
RH
5467
5468Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
5469system loader will load from the file. In the linker script, you
5470specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
5471sections in the segments. You use the @samp{:@var{phdr}} output section
5472attribute to place a section in a particular segment. @xref{Output
5473Section Phdr}.
5474
5475It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment. This
5476merely implies that one segment of memory contains another. You may
5477repeat @samp{:@var{phdr}}, using it once for each segment which should
5478contain the section.
5479
5480If you place a section in one or more segments using @samp{:@var{phdr}},
5481then the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do
5482not specify @samp{:@var{phdr}} in the same segments. This is for
5483convenience, since generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be
5484placed in a single segment. You can use @code{:NONE} to override the
5485default segment and tell the linker to not put the section in any
5486segment at all.
5487
5488@kindex FILEHDR
5489@kindex PHDRS
5c1a3f0f 5490You may use the @code{FILEHDR} and @code{PHDRS} keywords after
252b5132
RH
5491the program header type to further describe the contents of the segment.
5492The @code{FILEHDR} keyword means that the segment should include the ELF
5493file header. The @code{PHDRS} keyword means that the segment should
5c1a3f0f 5494include the ELF program headers themselves. If applied to a loadable
4100cea3
AM
5495segment (@code{PT_LOAD}), all prior loadable segments must have one of
5496these keywords.
252b5132
RH
5497
5498The @var{type} may be one of the following. The numbers indicate the
5499value of the keyword.
5500
5501@table @asis
5502@item @code{PT_NULL} (0)
5503Indicates an unused program header.
5504
5505@item @code{PT_LOAD} (1)
5506Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be loaded from
5507the file.
5508
5509@item @code{PT_DYNAMIC} (2)
5510Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
5511
5512@item @code{PT_INTERP} (3)
5513Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may be
5514found.
5515
5516@item @code{PT_NOTE} (4)
5517Indicates a segment holding note information.
5518
5519@item @code{PT_SHLIB} (5)
5520A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the ELF
5521ABI.
5522
5523@item @code{PT_PHDR} (6)
5524Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
5525
1a9ccd70
NC
5526@item @code{PT_TLS} (7)
5527Indicates a segment containing thread local storage.
5528
252b5132
RH
5529@item @var{expression}
5530An expression giving the numeric type of the program header. This may
5531be used for types not defined above.
5532@end table
5533
5534You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular address
5535in memory by using an @code{AT} expression. This is identical to the
5536@code{AT} command used as an output section attribute (@pxref{Output
5537Section LMA}). The @code{AT} command for a program header overrides the
5538output section attribute.
5539
5540The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
5541which comprise the segment. You may use the @code{FLAGS} keyword to
5542explicitly specify the segment flags. The value of @var{flags} must be
5543an integer. It is used to set the @code{p_flags} field of the program
5544header.
5545
5546Here is an example of @code{PHDRS}. This shows a typical set of program
5547headers used on a native ELF system.
5548
5549@example
5550@group
5551PHDRS
5552@{
5553 headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
5554 interp PT_INTERP ;
5555 text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
5556 data PT_LOAD ;
5557 dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
5558@}
5559
5560SECTIONS
5561@{
5562 . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
5563 .interp : @{ *(.interp) @} :text :interp
5564 .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text
5565 .rodata : @{ *(.rodata) @} /* defaults to :text */
5566 @dots{}
5567 . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
5568 .data : @{ *(.data) @} :data
5569 .dynamic : @{ *(.dynamic) @} :data :dynamic
5570 @dots{}
5571@}
5572@end group
5573@end example
5574
5575@node VERSION
5576@section VERSION Command
5577@kindex VERSION @{script text@}
5578@cindex symbol versions
5579@cindex version script
5580@cindex versions of symbols
5581The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF. Symbol versions are
5582only useful when using shared libraries. The dynamic linker can use
5583symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
5584a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
5585shared library.
5586
5587You can include a version script directly in the main linker script, or
5588you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script. You can
5589also use the @samp{--version-script} linker option.
5590
5591The syntax of the @code{VERSION} command is simply
5592@smallexample
5593VERSION @{ version-script-commands @}
5594@end smallexample
5595
5596The format of the version script commands is identical to that used by
5597Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5. The version script defines a tree of
5598version nodes. You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
5599version script. You can specify which symbols are bound to which
5600version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
5601scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
5602library.
5603
5604The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a few
5605examples.
5606
5607@smallexample
5608VERS_1.1 @{
5609 global:
5610 foo1;
5611 local:
a1ab1d2a
UD
5612 old*;
5613 original*;
5614 new*;
252b5132
RH
5615@};
5616
5617VERS_1.2 @{
5618 foo2;
5619@} VERS_1.1;
5620
5621VERS_2.0 @{
5622 bar1; bar2;
c0065db7 5623 extern "C++" @{
86043bbb 5624 ns::*;
bb1515f2
MF
5625 "f(int, double)";
5626 @};
252b5132
RH
5627@} VERS_1.2;
5628@end smallexample
5629
5630This example version script defines three version nodes. The first
5631version node defined is @samp{VERS_1.1}; it has no other dependencies.
5632The script binds the symbol @samp{foo1} to @samp{VERS_1.1}. It reduces
5633a number of symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside
313e35ee
AM
5634of the shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
5635symbol whose name begins with @samp{old}, @samp{original}, or @samp{new}
5636is matched. The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used
5637in the shell when matching filenames (also known as ``globbing'').
86043bbb
MM
5638However, if you specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the
5639name is treated as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
252b5132
RH
5640
5641Next, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_1.2}. This node
5642depends upon @samp{VERS_1.1}. The script binds the symbol @samp{foo2}
5643to the version node @samp{VERS_1.2}.
5644
5645Finally, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_2.0}. This node
5646depends upon @samp{VERS_1.2}. The scripts binds the symbols @samp{bar1}
5647and @samp{bar2} are bound to the version node @samp{VERS_2.0}.
5648
5649When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
5650specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
5651unspecified base version of the library. You can bind all otherwise
a981ed6f 5652unspecified symbols to a given version node by using @samp{global: *;}
ae5a3597
AM
5653somewhere in the version script. Note that it's slightly crazy to use
5654wildcards in a global spec except on the last version node. Global
5655wildcards elsewhere run the risk of accidentally adding symbols to the
5656set exported for an old version. That's wrong since older versions
5657ought to have a fixed set of symbols.
252b5132
RH
5658
5659The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than what
5660they might suggest to the person reading them. The @samp{2.0} version
5661could just as well have appeared in between @samp{1.1} and @samp{1.2}.
5662However, this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
5663
0f6bf451 5664Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node
6b9b879a
JJ
5665in the version script. Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
5666symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and which
5667won't.
5668
5669@smallexample
7c9c73be 5670@{ global: foo; bar; local: *; @};
9d201f2f 5671@end smallexample
6b9b879a 5672
252b5132
RH
5673When you link an application against a shared library that has versioned
5674symbols, the application itself knows which version of each symbol it
5675requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from each
5676shared library it is linked against. Thus at runtime, the dynamic
5677loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
5678linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
5679application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols. In this
5680way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
5681all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
5682search for each symbol reference.
5683
5684The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
5685doing minor version checking that SunOS does. The fundamental problem
5686that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
5687functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
5688the application starts up. If a shared library is out of date, a
5689required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
5690that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail. With symbol
5691versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
5692the libraries being used with the application are too old.
5693
5694There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach. The
5695first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
5696source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
5697script. This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
5698maintainer. You can do this by putting something like:
5699@smallexample
5700__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5701@end smallexample
5702@noindent
5703in the C source file. This renames the function @samp{original_foo} to
5704be an alias for @samp{foo} bound to the version node @samp{VERS_1.1}.
5705The @samp{local:} directive can be used to prevent the symbol
96a94295
L
5706@samp{original_foo} from being exported. A @samp{.symver} directive
5707takes precedence over a version script.
252b5132
RH
5708
5709The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
5710function to appear in a given shared library. In this way you can make
5711an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
5712version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
5713linked against the old interface to continue to function.
5714
5715To do this, you must use multiple @samp{.symver} directives in the
5716source file. Here is an example:
5717
5718@smallexample
5719__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@");
5720__asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5721__asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@@VERS_1.2");
5722__asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@@@VERS_2.0");
5723@end smallexample
5724
5725In this example, @samp{foo@@} represents the symbol @samp{foo} bound to the
5726unspecified base version of the symbol. The source file that contains this
5727example would define 4 C functions: @samp{original_foo}, @samp{old_foo},
5728@samp{old_foo1}, and @samp{new_foo}.
5729
5730When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to be
5731some way to specify a default version to which external references to
5732this symbol will be bound. You can do this with the
5733@samp{foo@@@@VERS_2.0} type of @samp{.symver} directive. You can only
5734declare one version of a symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise
5735you would effectively have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
5736
5737If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
5738within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
36f63dca 5739(i.e., @samp{old_foo}), or you can use the @samp{.symver} directive to
252b5132
RH
5740specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
5741
cb840a31
L
5742You can also specify the language in the version script:
5743
5744@smallexample
5745VERSION extern "lang" @{ version-script-commands @}
5746@end smallexample
5747
c0065db7 5748The supported @samp{lang}s are @samp{C}, @samp{C++}, and @samp{Java}.
cb840a31
L
5749The linker will iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and
5750demangle them according to @samp{lang} before matching them to the
bb1515f2
MF
5751patterns specified in @samp{version-script-commands}. The default
5752@samp{lang} is @samp{C}.
cb840a31 5753
86043bbb
MM
5754Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters. As
5755described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
5756or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly. In
5757the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
5758whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
5759cause a mismatch. As the exact string generated by the demangler
5760might change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you
5761should check that all of your version directives are behaving as you
5762expect when you upgrade.
5763
252b5132
RH
5764@node Expressions
5765@section Expressions in Linker Scripts
5766@cindex expressions
5767@cindex arithmetic
5768The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
5769that of C expressions. All expressions are evaluated as integers. All
5770expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
5771host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
5772
5773You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
5774
5775The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use in
5776expressions.
5777
5778@menu
5779* Constants:: Constants
0c71d759 5780* Symbolic Constants:: Symbolic constants
252b5132 5781* Symbols:: Symbol Names
ecca9871 5782* Orphan Sections:: Orphan Sections
252b5132
RH
5783* Location Counter:: The Location Counter
5784* Operators:: Operators
5785* Evaluation:: Evaluation
5786* Expression Section:: The Section of an Expression
5787* Builtin Functions:: Builtin Functions
5788@end menu
5789
5790@node Constants
5791@subsection Constants
5792@cindex integer notation
5793@cindex constants in linker scripts
5794All constants are integers.
5795
5796As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with @samp{0} to be
5797octal, and an integer beginning with @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} to be
8a308ae8 5798hexadecimal. Alternatively the linker accepts suffixes of @samp{h} or
11e7fd74 5799@samp{H} for hexadecimal, @samp{o} or @samp{O} for octal, @samp{b} or
8a308ae8
NC
5800@samp{B} for binary and @samp{d} or @samp{D} for decimal. Any integer
5801value without a prefix or a suffix is considered to be decimal.
252b5132
RH
5802
5803@cindex scaled integers
5804@cindex K and M integer suffixes
5805@cindex M and K integer suffixes
5806@cindex suffixes for integers
5807@cindex integer suffixes
5808In addition, you can use the suffixes @code{K} and @code{M} to scale a
5809constant by
5810@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5811@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5812@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5813@code{1024} or @code{1024*1024}
5814@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5815@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5816@tex
5817${\rm 1024}$ or ${\rm 1024}^2$
5818@end tex
5819@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
8a308ae8
NC
5820respectively. For example, the following
5821all refer to the same quantity:
5822
252b5132 5823@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
5824_fourk_1 = 4K;
5825_fourk_2 = 4096;
5826_fourk_3 = 0x1000;
8a308ae8 5827_fourk_4 = 10000o;
252b5132
RH
5828@end smallexample
5829
8a308ae8
NC
5830Note - the @code{K} and @code{M} suffixes cannot be used in
5831conjunction with the base suffixes mentioned above.
5832
0c71d759
NC
5833@node Symbolic Constants
5834@subsection Symbolic Constants
5835@cindex symbolic constants
5836@kindex CONSTANT
5837It is possible to refer to target specific constants via the use of
5838the @code{CONSTANT(@var{name})} operator, where @var{name} is one of:
5839
5840@table @code
5841@item MAXPAGESIZE
5842@kindex MAXPAGESIZE
5843The target's maximum page size.
5844
5845@item COMMONPAGESIZE
5846@kindex COMMONPAGESIZE
5847The target's default page size.
5848@end table
5849
5850So for example:
5851
5852@smallexample
9d5777a3 5853 .text ALIGN (CONSTANT (MAXPAGESIZE)) : @{ *(.text) @}
0c71d759
NC
5854@end smallexample
5855
5856will create a text section aligned to the largest page boundary
5857supported by the target.
5858
252b5132
RH
5859@node Symbols
5860@subsection Symbol Names
5861@cindex symbol names
5862@cindex names
5863@cindex quoted symbol names
5864@kindex "
5865Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
5866and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
5867Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords. You can
5868specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
5869keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
5870@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
5871"SECTION" = 9;
5872"with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
252b5132
RH
5873@end smallexample
5874
5875Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is safest
5876to delimit symbols with spaces. For example, @samp{A-B} is one symbol,
5877whereas @samp{A - B} is an expression involving subtraction.
5878
ecca9871
L
5879@node Orphan Sections
5880@subsection Orphan Sections
5881@cindex orphan
5882Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which
5883are not explicitly placed into the output file by the linker
5884script. The linker will still copy these sections into the
a87ded7b
AB
5885output file by either finding, or creating a suitable output section
5886in which to place the orphaned input section.
5887
5888If the name of an orphaned input section exactly matches the name of
5889an existing output section, then the orphaned input section will be
5890placed at the end of that output section.
5891
5892If there is no output section with a matching name then new output
5893sections will be created. Each new output section will have the same
5894name as the orphan section placed within it. If there are multiple
5895orphan sections with the same name, these will all be combined into
5896one new output section.
5897
5898If new output sections are created to hold orphaned input sections,
5899then the linker must decide where to place these new output sections
e299b355
AM
5900in relation to existing output sections. On most modern targets, the
5901linker attempts to place orphan sections after sections of the same
5902attribute, such as code vs data, loadable vs non-loadable, etc. If no
5903sections with matching attributes are found, or your target lacks this
5904support, the orphan section is placed at the end of the file.
ecca9871 5905
a05a5b64
TP
5906The command-line options @samp{--orphan-handling} and @samp{--unique}
5907(@pxref{Options,,Command-line Options}) can be used to control which
c005eb9e
AB
5908output sections an orphan is placed in.
5909
252b5132
RH
5910@node Location Counter
5911@subsection The Location Counter
5912@kindex .
5913@cindex dot
5914@cindex location counter
5915@cindex current output location
5916The special linker variable @dfn{dot} @samp{.} always contains the
5917current output location counter. Since the @code{.} always refers to a
5918location in an output section, it may only appear in an expression
5919within a @code{SECTIONS} command. The @code{.} symbol may appear
5920anywhere that an ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
5921
5922@cindex holes
5923Assigning a value to @code{.} will cause the location counter to be
5924moved. This may be used to create holes in the output section. The
dc0b6aa0
AM
5925location counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section,
5926and may not be moved backwards outside of an output section if so
5927doing creates areas with overlapping LMAs.
252b5132
RH
5928
5929@smallexample
5930SECTIONS
5931@{
5932 output :
5933 @{
5934 file1(.text)
5935 . = . + 1000;
5936 file2(.text)
5937 . += 1000;
5938 file3(.text)
563e308f 5939 @} = 0x12345678;
252b5132
RH
5940@}
5941@end smallexample
5942@noindent
5943In the previous example, the @samp{.text} section from @file{file1} is
5944located at the beginning of the output section @samp{output}. It is
5945followed by a 1000 byte gap. Then the @samp{.text} section from
5946@file{file2} appears, also with a 1000 byte gap following before the
563e308f 5947@samp{.text} section from @file{file3}. The notation @samp{= 0x12345678}
252b5132
RH
5948specifies what data to write in the gaps (@pxref{Output Section Fill}).
5949
5c6bbab8
NC
5950@cindex dot inside sections
5951Note: @code{.} actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
5952current containing object. Normally this is the @code{SECTIONS}
69da35b5 5953statement, whose start address is 0, hence @code{.} can be used as an
5c6bbab8
NC
5954absolute address. If @code{.} is used inside a section description
5955however, it refers to the byte offset from the start of that section,
5956not an absolute address. Thus in a script like this:
5957
5958@smallexample
5959SECTIONS
5960@{
5961 . = 0x100
5962 .text: @{
5963 *(.text)
5964 . = 0x200
5965 @}
5966 . = 0x500
5967 .data: @{
5968 *(.data)
5969 . += 0x600
5970 @}
5971@}
5972@end smallexample
5973
5974The @samp{.text} section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100
5975and a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in
5976the @samp{.text} input sections to fill this area. (If there is too
5977much data, an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to
5978move @code{.} backwards). The @samp{.data} section will start at 0x500
5979and it will have an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of
5980the values from the @samp{.data} input sections and before the end of
5981the @samp{.data} output section itself.
5982
b5666f2f
AM
5983@cindex dot outside sections
5984Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
5985output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
5986needs to place orphan sections. For example, given the following:
5987
5988@smallexample
5989SECTIONS
5990@{
5991 start_of_text = . ;
5992 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5993 end_of_text = . ;
5994
5995 start_of_data = . ;
5996 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5997 end_of_data = . ;
5998@}
5999@end smallexample
6000
6001If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. @code{.rodata},
6002not mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section
6003between @code{.text} and @code{.data}. You might think the linker
6004should place @code{.rodata} on the blank line in the above script, but
6005blank lines are of no particular significance to the linker. As well,
6006the linker doesn't associate the above symbol names with their
6007sections. Instead, it assumes that all assignments or other
6008statements belong to the previous output section, except for the
6009special case of an assignment to @code{.}. I.e., the linker will
6010place the orphan @code{.rodata} section as if the script was written
6011as follows:
6012
6013@smallexample
6014SECTIONS
6015@{
6016 start_of_text = . ;
6017 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
6018 end_of_text = . ;
6019
6020 start_of_data = . ;
6021 .rodata: @{ *(.rodata) @}
6022 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
6023 end_of_data = . ;
6024@}
6025@end smallexample
6026
6027This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
6028@code{start_of_data}. One way to influence the orphan section
6029placement is to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker
6030assumes that an assignment to @code{.} is setting the start address of
6031a following output section and thus should be grouped with that
6032section. So you could write:
6033
6034@smallexample
6035SECTIONS
6036@{
6037 start_of_text = . ;
6038 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
6039 end_of_text = . ;
6040
6041 . = . ;
6042 start_of_data = . ;
6043 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
6044 end_of_data = . ;
6045@}
6046@end smallexample
6047
6048Now, the orphan @code{.rodata} section will be placed between
6049@code{end_of_text} and @code{start_of_data}.
6050
252b5132
RH
6051@need 2000
6052@node Operators
6053@subsection Operators
6054@cindex operators for arithmetic
6055@cindex arithmetic operators
6056@cindex precedence in expressions
6057The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
6058the standard bindings and precedence levels:
6059@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 6060@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
6061@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6062@smallexample
6063precedence associativity Operators Notes
6064(highest)
60651 left ! - ~ (1)
60662 left * / %
60673 left + -
60684 left >> <<
60695 left == != > < <= >=
60706 left &
60717 left |
60728 left &&
60739 left ||
607410 right ? :
607511 right &= += -= *= /= (2)
6076(lowest)
6077@end smallexample
6078Notes:
a1ab1d2a 6079(1) Prefix operators
252b5132
RH
6080(2) @xref{Assignments}.
6081@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 6082@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
6083@tex
6084\vskip \baselineskip
6085%"lispnarrowing" is the extra indent used generally for smallexample
6086\hskip\lispnarrowing\vbox{\offinterlineskip
6087\hrule
6088\halign
6089{\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ {\tt #}\ \hfil&\vrule#\cr
6090height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6091&Precedence&& Associativity &&{\rm Operators}&\cr
6092height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6093\noalign{\hrule}
6094height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6095&highest&&&&&\cr
6096% '176 is tilde, '~' in tt font
a1ab1d2a 6097&1&&left&&\qquad- \char'176\ !\qquad\dag&\cr
252b5132
RH
6098&2&&left&&* / \%&\cr
6099&3&&left&&+ -&\cr
6100&4&&left&&>> <<&\cr
6101&5&&left&&== != > < <= >=&\cr
6102&6&&left&&\&&\cr
6103&7&&left&&|&\cr
6104&8&&left&&{\&\&}&\cr
6105&9&&left&&||&\cr
6106&10&&right&&? :&\cr
6107&11&&right&&\qquad\&= += -= *= /=\qquad\ddag&\cr
6108&lowest&&&&&\cr
6109height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr}
6110\hrule}
6111@end tex
6112@iftex
6113{
6114@obeylines@parskip=0pt@parindent=0pt
6115@dag@quad Prefix operators.
6116@ddag@quad @xref{Assignments}.
6117}
6118@end iftex
6119@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6120
6121@node Evaluation
6122@subsection Evaluation
6123@cindex lazy evaluation
6124@cindex expression evaluation order
6125The linker evaluates expressions lazily. It only computes the value of
6126an expression when absolutely necessary.
6127
6128The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
6129address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
6130regions, in order to do any linking at all. These values are computed
6131as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
6132
6133However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
6134until after storage allocation. Such values are evaluated later, when
6135other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
6136for use in the symbol assignment expression.
6137
6138The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
6139assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
6140allocation.
6141
6142Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
6143@samp{.}, must be evaluated during section allocation.
6144
6145If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
6146available, then an error results. For example, a script like the
6147following
6148@smallexample
6149@group
6150SECTIONS
6151 @{
a1ab1d2a 6152 .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
252b5132
RH
6153 @{ *(.text) @}
6154 @}
6155@end group
6156@end smallexample
6157@noindent
6158will cause the error message @samp{non constant expression for initial
6159address}.
6160
6161@node Expression Section
6162@subsection The Section of an Expression
6163@cindex expression sections
6164@cindex absolute expressions
6165@cindex relative expressions
6166@cindex absolute and relocatable symbols
6167@cindex relocatable and absolute symbols
6168@cindex symbols, relocatable and absolute
7542af2a
AM
6169Addresses and symbols may be section relative, or absolute. A section
6170relative symbol is relocatable. If you request relocatable output
6171using the @samp{-r} option, a further link operation may change the
6172value of a section relative symbol. On the other hand, an absolute
6173symbol will retain the same value throughout any further link
6174operations.
6175
abf4be64
AM
6176Some terms in linker expressions are addresses. This is true of
6177section relative symbols and for builtin functions that return an
6178address, such as @code{ADDR}, @code{LOADADDR}, @code{ORIGIN} and
6179@code{SEGMENT_START}. Other terms are simply numbers, or are builtin
6180functions that return a non-address value, such as @code{LENGTH}.
01554a74
AM
6181One complication is that unless you set @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")}
6182(@pxref{Miscellaneous Commands}), numbers and absolute symbols are treated
5c3049d2
AM
6183differently depending on their location, for compatibility with older
6184versions of @code{ld}. Expressions appearing outside an output
6185section definition treat all numbers as absolute addresses.
6186Expressions appearing inside an output section definition treat
01554a74
AM
6187absolute symbols as numbers. If @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} is
6188given, then absolute symbols and numbers are simply treated as numbers
6189everywhere.
5c3049d2
AM
6190
6191In the following simple example,
252b5132 6192
7542af2a
AM
6193@smallexample
6194@group
6195SECTIONS
6196 @{
6197 . = 0x100;
6198 __executable_start = 0x100;
6199 .data :
6200 @{
6201 . = 0x10;
6202 __data_start = 0x10;
6203 *(.data)
6204 @}
6205 @dots{}
6206 @}
6207@end group
6208@end smallexample
252b5132 6209
7542af2a
AM
6210both @code{.} and @code{__executable_start} are set to the absolute
6211address 0x100 in the first two assignments, then both @code{.} and
6212@code{__data_start} are set to 0x10 relative to the @code{.data}
6213section in the second two assignments.
252b5132 6214
5c3049d2
AM
6215For expressions involving numbers, relative addresses and absolute
6216addresses, ld follows these rules to evaluate terms:
7542af2a
AM
6217
6218@itemize @bullet
6219@item
c05f749e
AM
6220Unary operations on an absolute address or number, and binary
6221operations on two absolute addresses or two numbers, or between one
6222absolute address and a number, apply the operator to the value(s).
6223@item
7542af2a
AM
6224Unary operations on a relative address, and binary operations on two
6225relative addresses in the same section or between one relative address
6226and a number, apply the operator to the offset part of the address(es).
6227@item
c05f749e
AM
6228Other binary operations, that is, between two relative addresses not
6229in the same section, or between a relative address and an absolute
6230address, first convert any non-absolute term to an absolute address
6231before applying the operator.
7542af2a
AM
6232@end itemize
6233
6234The result section of each sub-expression is as follows:
6235
6236@itemize @bullet
6237@item
6238An operation involving only numbers results in a number.
6239@item
6240The result of comparisons, @samp{&&} and @samp{||} is also a number.
6241@item
9bc8bb33 6242The result of other binary arithmetic and logical operations on two
11e7fd74 6243relative addresses in the same section or two absolute addresses
94b41882
AM
6244(after above conversions) is also a number when
6245@code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} or inside an output section definition
6246but an absolute address otherwise.
9bc8bb33
AM
6247@item
6248The result of other operations on relative addresses or one
6249relative address and a number, is a relative address in the same
6250section as the relative operand(s).
7542af2a
AM
6251@item
6252The result of other operations on absolute addresses (after above
6253conversions) is an absolute address.
6254@end itemize
252b5132
RH
6255
6256You can use the builtin function @code{ABSOLUTE} to force an expression
6257to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative. For example, to
6258create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
6259section @samp{.data}:
6260@smallexample
6261SECTIONS
6262 @{
6263 .data : @{ *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); @}
6264 @}
6265@end smallexample
6266@noindent
6267If @samp{ABSOLUTE} were not used, @samp{_edata} would be relative to the
6268@samp{.data} section.
6269
7542af2a
AM
6270Using @code{LOADADDR} also forces an expression absolute, since this
6271particular builtin function returns an absolute address.
6272
252b5132
RH
6273@node Builtin Functions
6274@subsection Builtin Functions
6275@cindex functions in expressions
6276The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
6277use in linker script expressions.
6278
6279@table @code
6280@item ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
6281@kindex ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
6282@cindex expression, absolute
6283Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative) value
6284of the expression @var{exp}. Primarily useful to assign an absolute
6285value to a symbol within a section definition, where symbol values are
6286normally section relative. @xref{Expression Section}.
6287
6288@item ADDR(@var{section})
6289@kindex ADDR(@var{section})
6290@cindex section address in expression
7542af2a 6291Return the address (VMA) of the named @var{section}. Your
252b5132 6292script must previously have defined the location of that section. In
7542af2a
AM
6293the following example, @code{start_of_output_1}, @code{symbol_1} and
6294@code{symbol_2} are assigned equivalent values, except that
6295@code{symbol_1} will be relative to the @code{.output1} section while
6296the other two will be absolute:
252b5132
RH
6297@smallexample
6298@group
6299SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6300 .output1 :
a1ab1d2a 6301 @{
252b5132
RH
6302 start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
6303 @dots{}
6304 @}
6305 .output :
6306 @{
6307 symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
6308 symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
6309 @}
6310@dots{} @}
6311@end group
6312@end smallexample
6313
876f4090
NS
6314@item ALIGN(@var{align})
6315@itemx ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
6316@kindex ALIGN(@var{align})
6317@kindex ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
252b5132
RH
6318@cindex round up location counter
6319@cindex align location counter
876f4090
NS
6320@cindex round up expression
6321@cindex align expression
6322Return the location counter (@code{.}) or arbitrary expression aligned
6323to the next @var{align} boundary. The single operand @code{ALIGN}
6324doesn't change the value of the location counter---it just does
6325arithmetic on it. The two operand @code{ALIGN} allows an arbitrary
6326expression to be aligned upwards (@code{ALIGN(@var{align})} is
e0a3af22 6327equivalent to @code{ALIGN(ABSOLUTE(.), @var{align})}).
876f4090
NS
6328
6329Here is an example which aligns the output @code{.data} section to the
6330next @code{0x2000} byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
6331variable within the section to the next @code{0x8000} boundary after the
6332input sections:
252b5132
RH
6333@smallexample
6334@group
6335SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6336 .data ALIGN(0x2000): @{
6337 *(.data)
6338 variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
6339 @}
6340@dots{} @}
6341@end group
6342@end smallexample
6343@noindent
6344The first use of @code{ALIGN} in this example specifies the location of
6345a section because it is used as the optional @var{address} attribute of
6346a section definition (@pxref{Output Section Address}). The second use
6347of @code{ALIGN} is used to defines the value of a symbol.
6348
6349The builtin function @code{NEXT} is closely related to @code{ALIGN}.
6350
362c1d1a
NS
6351@item ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6352@kindex ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6353@cindex section alignment
6354Return the alignment in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6355been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6356evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6357the alignment of the @code{.output} section is stored as the first
6358value in that section.
6359@smallexample
6360@group
6361SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6362 .output @{
6363 LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
6364 @dots{}
6365 @}
6366@dots{} @}
6367@end group
6368@end smallexample
6369
252b5132
RH
6370@item BLOCK(@var{exp})
6371@kindex BLOCK(@var{exp})
6372This is a synonym for @code{ALIGN}, for compatibility with older linker
6373scripts. It is most often seen when setting the address of an output
6374section.
6375
2d20f7bf
JJ
6376@item DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6377@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6378This is equivalent to either
6379@smallexample
6380(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - 1)))
6381@end smallexample
6382or
6383@smallexample
fe6052e1
AM
6384(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize})
6385 + ((. + @var{commonpagesize} - 1) & (@var{maxpagesize} - @var{commonpagesize})))
2d20f7bf
JJ
6386@end smallexample
6387@noindent
6388depending on whether the latter uses fewer @var{commonpagesize} sized pages
6389for the data segment (area between the result of this expression and
6390@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}) than the former or not.
6391If the latter form is used, it means @var{commonpagesize} bytes of runtime
6392memory will be saved at the expense of up to @var{commonpagesize} wasted
6393bytes in the on-disk file.
6394
6395This expression can only be used directly in @code{SECTIONS} commands, not in
6396any output section descriptions and only once in the linker script.
6397@var{commonpagesize} should be less or equal to @var{maxpagesize} and should
def5c83c
AM
6398be the system page size the object wants to be optimized for while still
6399running on system page sizes up to @var{maxpagesize}. Note however
6400that @samp{-z relro} protection will not be effective if the system
6401page size is larger than @var{commonpagesize}.
2d20f7bf
JJ
6402
6403@noindent
6404Example:
6405@smallexample
6406 . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
6407@end smallexample
6408
6409@item DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6410@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6411This defines the end of data segment for @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}
6412evaluation purposes.
6413
6414@smallexample
6415 . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
6416@end smallexample
6417
a4f5ad88
JJ
6418@item DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6419@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6420This defines the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment when
eec2f3ed 6421@samp{-z relro} option is used.
a4f5ad88
JJ
6422When @samp{-z relro} option is not present, @code{DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END}
6423does nothing, otherwise @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} is padded so that
def5c83c
AM
6424@var{exp} + @var{offset} is aligned to the @var{commonpagesize}
6425argument given to @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}. If present in the linker
6426script, it must be placed between @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} and
eec2f3ed
AM
6427@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}. Evaluates to the second argument plus any
6428padding needed at the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment due to
6429section alignment.
a4f5ad88
JJ
6430
6431@smallexample
6432 . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
6433@end smallexample
6434
252b5132
RH
6435@item DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6436@kindex DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6437@cindex symbol defaults
6438Return 1 if @var{symbol} is in the linker global symbol table and is
420e579c
HPN
6439defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
6440return 0. You can use this function to provide
252b5132
RH
6441default values for symbols. For example, the following script fragment
6442shows how to set a global symbol @samp{begin} to the first location in
6443the @samp{.text} section---but if a symbol called @samp{begin} already
6444existed, its value is preserved:
6445
6446@smallexample
6447@group
6448SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6449 .text : @{
6450 begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
6451 @dots{}
6452 @}
6453 @dots{}
6454@}
6455@end group
6456@end smallexample
6457
3ec57632
NC
6458@item LENGTH(@var{memory})
6459@kindex LENGTH(@var{memory})
6460Return the length of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6461
252b5132
RH
6462@item LOADADDR(@var{section})
6463@kindex LOADADDR(@var{section})
6464@cindex section load address in expression
7542af2a 6465Return the absolute LMA of the named @var{section}. (@pxref{Output
252b5132
RH
6466Section LMA}).
6467
2e53f7d6
NC
6468@item LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6469@kindex LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6470Return the binary logarithm of @var{exp} rounded towards infinity.
6471@code{LOG2CEIL(0)} returns 0.
6472
252b5132
RH
6473@kindex MAX
6474@item MAX(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6475Returns the maximum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6476
6477@kindex MIN
6478@item MIN(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6479Returns the minimum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6480
6481@item NEXT(@var{exp})
6482@kindex NEXT(@var{exp})
6483@cindex unallocated address, next
6484Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of @var{exp}.
6485This function is closely related to @code{ALIGN(@var{exp})}; unless you
6486use the @code{MEMORY} command to define discontinuous memory for the
6487output file, the two functions are equivalent.
6488
3ec57632
NC
6489@item ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6490@kindex ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6491Return the origin of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6492
ba916c8a
MM
6493@item SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6494@kindex SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6495Return the base address of the named @var{segment}. If an explicit
c5da8c7d
NC
6496value has already been given for this segment (with a command-line
6497@samp{-T} option) then that value will be returned otherwise the value
6498will be @var{default}. At present, the @samp{-T} command-line option
6499can only be used to set the base address for the ``text'', ``data'', and
7542af2a 6500``bss'' sections, but you can use @code{SEGMENT_START} with any segment
ba916c8a
MM
6501name.
6502
252b5132
RH
6503@item SIZEOF(@var{section})
6504@kindex SIZEOF(@var{section})
6505@cindex section size
6506Return the size in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6507been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6508evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6509@code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned identical values:
6510@smallexample
6511@group
6512SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6513 .output @{
6514 .start = . ;
6515 @dots{}
6516 .end = . ;
6517 @}
6518 symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
6519 symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
6520@dots{} @}
6521@end group
6522@end smallexample
6523
6524@item SIZEOF_HEADERS
6525@itemx sizeof_headers
6526@kindex SIZEOF_HEADERS
6527@cindex header size
6528Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers. This is
6529information which appears at the start of the output file. You can use
6530this number when setting the start address of the first section, if you
6531choose, to facilitate paging.
6532
6533@cindex not enough room for program headers
6534@cindex program headers, not enough room
6535When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
6536@code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} builtin function, the linker must compute the
6537number of program headers before it has determined all the section
6538addresses and sizes. If the linker later discovers that it needs
6539additional program headers, it will report an error @samp{not enough
6540room for program headers}. To avoid this error, you must avoid using
6541the @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} function, or you must rework your linker
6542script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program headers, or
6543you must define the program headers yourself using the @code{PHDRS}
6544command (@pxref{PHDRS}).
6545@end table
6546
6547@node Implicit Linker Scripts
6548@section Implicit Linker Scripts
6549@cindex implicit linker scripts
6550If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
6551an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
6552linker script. If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
6553linker will report an error.
6554
6555An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
6556
6557Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
6558assignments, or the @code{INPUT}, @code{GROUP}, or @code{VERSION}
6559commands.
6560
6561Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be read
6562at the position in the command line where the implicit linker script was
6563read. This can affect archive searching.
6564
6565@ifset GENERIC
6566@node Machine Dependent
6567@chapter Machine Dependent Features
6568
6569@cindex machine dependencies
ff5dcc92
SC
6570@command{ld} has additional features on some platforms; the following
6571sections describe them. Machines where @command{ld} has no additional
252b5132
RH
6572functionality are not listed.
6573
6574@menu
36f63dca
NC
6575@ifset H8300
6576* H8/300:: @command{ld} and the H8/300
6577@end ifset
7ca01ed9
NC
6578@ifset M68HC11
6579* M68HC11/68HC12:: @code{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6580@end ifset
36f63dca
NC
6581@ifset ARM
6582* ARM:: @command{ld} and the ARM family
6583@end ifset
6584@ifset HPPA
6585* HPPA ELF32:: @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF
6586@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
6587@ifset M68K
6588* M68K:: @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6589@end ifset
833794fc
MR
6590@ifset MIPS
6591* MIPS:: @command{ld} and the MIPS family
6592@end ifset
3c3bdf30 6593@ifset MMIX
36f63dca 6594* MMIX:: @command{ld} and MMIX
3c3bdf30 6595@end ifset
2469cfa2 6596@ifset MSP430
36f63dca 6597* MSP430:: @command{ld} and MSP430
2469cfa2 6598@end ifset
35c08157
KLC
6599@ifset NDS32
6600* NDS32:: @command{ld} and NDS32
6601@end ifset
78058a5e
SL
6602@ifset NIOSII
6603* Nios II:: @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
6604@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
6605@ifset POWERPC
6606* PowerPC ELF32:: @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6607@end ifset
6608@ifset POWERPC64
6609* PowerPC64 ELF64:: @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6610@end ifset
b4cbbe8f
AK
6611@ifset S/390
6612* S/390 ELF:: @command{ld} and S/390 ELF Support
6613@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
6614@ifset SPU
6615* SPU ELF:: @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6616@end ifset
74459f0e 6617@ifset TICOFF
ff5dcc92 6618* TI COFF:: @command{ld} and TI COFF
74459f0e 6619@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
6620@ifset WIN32
6621* WIN32:: @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
6622@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
6623@ifset XTENSA
6624* Xtensa:: @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors
6625@end ifset
252b5132
RH
6626@end menu
6627@end ifset
6628
252b5132
RH
6629@ifset H8300
6630@ifclear GENERIC
6631@raisesections
6632@end ifclear
6633
6634@node H8/300
ff5dcc92 6635@section @command{ld} and the H8/300
252b5132
RH
6636
6637@cindex H8/300 support
ff5dcc92 6638For the H8/300, @command{ld} can perform these global optimizations when
252b5132
RH
6639you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6640
6641@table @emph
6642@cindex relaxing on H8/300
6643@item relaxing address modes
ff5dcc92 6644@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
252b5132
RH
6645targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6646program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6647respectively.
6648
6649@cindex synthesizing on H8/300
6650@item synthesizing instructions
81f5558e 6651@c FIXME: specifically mov.b, or any mov instructions really? -> mov.b only, at least on H8, H8H, H8S
ff5dcc92 6652@command{ld} finds all @code{mov.b} instructions which use the
252b5132
RH
6653sixteen-bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6654page of memory, and changes them to use the eight-bit address form.
6655(That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:16} into
6656@samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in the
6657top page of memory).
1502569c 6658
81f5558e
NC
6659@command{ld} finds all @code{mov} instructions which use the register
6660indirect with 32-bit displacement addressing mode, but use a small
6661displacement inside 16-bit displacement range, and changes them to use
6662the 16-bit displacement form. (That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b
6663@code{@@}@var{d}:32,ERx} into @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{d}:16,ERx}
6664whenever the displacement @var{d} is in the 16 bit signed integer
6665range. Only implemented in ELF-format ld).
6666
1502569c 6667@item bit manipulation instructions
c0065db7 6668@command{ld} finds all bit manipulation instructions like @code{band, bclr,
1502569c 6669biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst, bxor}
c0065db7 6670which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
1502569c
NC
6671page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit address form.
6672(That is: the linker turns @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:32} into
c0065db7 6673@samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c
NC
6674the top page of memory).
6675
6676@item system control instructions
c0065db7
RM
6677@command{ld} finds all @code{ldc.w, stc.w} instructions which use the
667832 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
1502569c
NC
6679changes them to use 16 bit address form.
6680(That is: the linker turns @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:32,ccr} into
c0065db7 6681@samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:16,ccr} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c 6682the top page of memory).
252b5132
RH
6683@end table
6684
6685@ifclear GENERIC
6686@lowersections
6687@end ifclear
6688@end ifset
6689
36f63dca 6690@ifclear GENERIC
c2dcd04e 6691@ifset Renesas
36f63dca 6692@c This stuff is pointless to say unless you're especially concerned
c2dcd04e
NC
6693@c with Renesas chips; don't enable it for generic case, please.
6694@node Renesas
6695@chapter @command{ld} and Other Renesas Chips
36f63dca 6696
c2dcd04e
NC
6697@command{ld} also supports the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) H8/300H,
6698H8/500, and SH chips. No special features, commands, or command-line
6699options are required for these chips.
36f63dca
NC
6700@end ifset
6701@end ifclear
6702
36f63dca
NC
6703@ifset ARM
6704@ifclear GENERIC
6705@raisesections
6706@end ifclear
6707
93fd0973
SC
6708@ifset M68HC11
6709@ifclear GENERIC
6710@raisesections
6711@end ifclear
6712
6713@node M68HC11/68HC12
6714@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6715
6716@cindex M68HC11 and 68HC12 support
6717
6718@subsection Linker Relaxation
6719
6720For the Motorola 68HC11, @command{ld} can perform these global
6721optimizations when you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6722
6723@table @emph
6724@cindex relaxing on M68HC11
6725@item relaxing address modes
6726@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6727targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6728program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6729respectively.
6730
6731@command{ld} also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
6732transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
6733page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
6734
6735@item relaxing gcc instruction group
6736When @command{gcc} is called with @option{-mrelax}, it can emit group
6737of instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
6738addressing mode. These instructions consists of @code{bclr} or
6739@code{bset} instructions.
6740
6741@end table
6742
6743@subsection Trampoline Generation
6744
6745@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC11
6746@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC12
6747For 68HC11 and 68HC12, @command{ld} can generate trampoline code to
6748call a far function using a normal @code{jsr} instruction. The linker
c0065db7 6749will also change the relocation to some far function to use the
93fd0973
SC
6750trampoline address instead of the function address. This is typically the
6751case when a pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact
6752point to the function trampoline.
6753
6754@ifclear GENERIC
6755@lowersections
6756@end ifclear
6757@end ifset
6758
36f63dca 6759@node ARM
3674e28a 6760@section @command{ld} and the ARM family
36f63dca
NC
6761
6762@cindex ARM interworking support
6763@kindex --support-old-code
6764For the ARM, @command{ld} will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
b45619c0 6765between ARM and Thumb code. These stubs only work with code that has
36f63dca
NC
6766been compiled and assembled with the @samp{-mthumb-interwork} command
6767line option. If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
6768libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
a05a5b64 6769option then the @samp{--support-old-code} command-line switch should be
36f63dca
NC
6770given to the linker. This will make it generate larger stub functions
6771which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code. Note, however,
6772the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
6773non-interworking aware Thumb code.
6774
6775@cindex thumb entry point
6776@cindex entry point, thumb
6777@kindex --thumb-entry=@var{entry}
6778The @samp{--thumb-entry} switch is a duplicate of the generic
6779@samp{--entry} switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.
6780But it also sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be
6781branched to using a BX instruction, and the program will start
6782executing in Thumb mode straight away.
6783
ce11ba6c
KT
6784@cindex PE import table prefixing
6785@kindex --use-nul-prefixed-import-tables
6786The @samp{--use-nul-prefixed-import-tables} switch is specifying, that
6787the import tables idata4 and idata5 have to be generated with a zero
11e7fd74 6788element prefix for import libraries. This is the old style to generate
ce11ba6c
KT
6789import tables. By default this option is turned off.
6790
e489d0ae
PB
6791@cindex BE8
6792@kindex --be8
6793The @samp{--be8} switch instructs @command{ld} to generate BE8 format
080bb7bb
NC
6794executables. This option is only valid when linking big-endian
6795objects - ie ones which have been assembled with the @option{-EB}
6796option. The resulting image will contain big-endian data and
6797little-endian code.
e489d0ae 6798
3674e28a
PB
6799@cindex TARGET1
6800@kindex --target1-rel
6801@kindex --target1-abs
6802The @samp{R_ARM_TARGET1} relocation is typically used for entries in the
6803@samp{.init_array} section. It is interpreted as either @samp{R_ARM_REL32}
6804or @samp{R_ARM_ABS32}, depending on the target. The @samp{--target1-rel}
6805and @samp{--target1-abs} switches override the default.
6806
6807@cindex TARGET2
6808@kindex --target2=@var{type}
6809The @samp{--target2=type} switch overrides the default definition of the
6810@samp{R_ARM_TARGET2} relocation. Valid values for @samp{type}, their
6811meanings, and target defaults are as follows:
6812@table @samp
6813@item rel
eeac373a
PB
6814@samp{R_ARM_REL32} (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
6815@item abs
6816@samp{R_ARM_ABS32} (arm*-*-symbianelf)
3674e28a
PB
6817@item got-rel
6818@samp{R_ARM_GOT_PREL} (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
6819@end table
6820
319850b4
JB
6821@cindex FIX_V4BX
6822@kindex --fix-v4bx
6823The @samp{R_ARM_V4BX} relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF
6824specification) enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
6825interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t, but
6826also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4 objects.
6827
6828In the latter case, the switch @option{--fix-v4bx} must be passed to the
6829linker, which causes v4t @code{BX rM} instructions to be rewritten as
6830@code{MOV PC,rM}, since v4 processors do not have a @code{BX} instruction.
6831
6832In the former case, the switch should not be used, and @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6833relocations are ignored.
6834
845b51d6
PB
6835@cindex FIX_V4BX_INTERWORKING
6836@kindex --fix-v4bx-interworking
6837Replace @code{BX rM} instructions identified by @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6838relocations with a branch to the following veneer:
6839
6840@smallexample
6841TST rM, #1
6842MOVEQ PC, rM
6843BX Rn
6844@end smallexample
6845
6846This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4 cores
6847and are still interworking safe. Note that the above veneer clobbers the
11e7fd74 6848condition flags, so may cause incorrect program behavior in rare cases.
845b51d6 6849
33bfe774
JB
6850@cindex USE_BLX
6851@kindex --use-blx
6852The @samp{--use-blx} switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb
6853BLX instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various
6854situations. Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb
6855code using BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before
6856each PLT entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
6857
6858This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need to
6859specify it if you are using that target.
6860
c6dd86c6
JB
6861@cindex VFP11_DENORM_FIX
6862@kindex --vfp11-denorm-fix
6863The @samp{--vfp11-denorm-fix} switch enables a link-time workaround for a
6864bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
6865instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support code)
6866to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions before
6867the support code can read the intended values.
6868
6869The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
6870intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a register
6871and another instruction which writes to the same register, or at least two
6872intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug only affects
6873full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this workaround if
6874you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for further details.
6875
6876If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can
6877enable this workaround by specifying the linker option
6878@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar} if you are using the VFP11 scalar
6879mode only, or @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=vector} if you are using
6880vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code). The default is
6881@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=none}.
6882
6883If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6884potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6885such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the
6886first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
6887instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
6888the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the veneer
6889are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector cases.
6890
2de70689
MGD
6891@cindex ARM1176 erratum workaround
6892@kindex --fix-arm1176
6893@kindex --no-fix-arm1176
9d5777a3
RM
6894The @samp{--fix-arm1176} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum
6895in certain ARM1176 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you
6896are targeting ARM v6 (excluding ARM v6T2) or earlier. It can be disabled
2de70689
MGD
6897unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-arm1176}.
6898
9d5777a3 6899Further information is available in the ``ARM1176JZ-S and ARM1176JZF-S
11e7fd74 6900Programmer Advice Notice'' available on the ARM documentation website at:
2de70689
MGD
6901http://infocenter.arm.com/.
6902
a504d23a
LA
6903@cindex STM32L4xx erratum workaround
6904@kindex --fix-stm32l4xx-629360
6905
6906The @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360} switch enables a link-time
6907workaround for a bug in the bus matrix / memory controller for some of
6908the STM32 Cortex-M4 based products (STM32L4xx). When accessing
6909off-chip memory via the affected bus for bus reads of 9 words or more,
6910the bus can generate corrupt data and/or abort. These are only
6911core-initiated accesses (not DMA), and might affect any access:
6912integer loads such as LDM, POP and floating-point loads such as VLDM,
6913VPOP. Stores are not affected.
6914
6915The bug can be avoided by splitting memory accesses into the
6916necessary chunks to keep bus reads below 8 words.
6917
6918The workaround is not enabled by default, this is equivalent to use
6919@samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360=none}. If you know you are using buggy
6920STM32L4xx hardware, you can enable the workaround by specifying the
6921linker option @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360}, or the equivalent
6922@samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360=default}.
6923
6924If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6925potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6926such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists in a
6927replacement sequence emulating the behaviour of the original one and a
6928branch back to the subsequent instruction. The original instruction is
6929then replaced with a branch to the veneer.
6930
6931The workaround does not always preserve the memory access order for
6932the LDMDB instruction, when the instruction loads the PC.
6933
6934The workaround is not able to handle problematic instructions when
6935they are in the middle of an IT block, since a branch is not allowed
6936there. In that case, the linker reports a warning and no replacement
6937occurs.
6938
6939The workaround is not able to replace problematic instructions with a
6940PC-relative branch instruction if the @samp{.text} section is too
6941large. In that case, when the branch that replaces the original code
6942cannot be encoded, the linker reports a warning and no replacement
6943occurs.
6944
bf21ed78
MS
6945@cindex NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING
6946@kindex --no-enum-size-warning
726150b7 6947The @option{--no-enum-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
bf21ed78
MS
6948warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6949enumeration size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6950linking of an object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another
6951using enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will
6952not be diagnosed.
a9dc9481
JM
6953
6954@cindex NO_WCHAR_SIZE_WARNING
6955@kindex --no-wchar-size-warning
6956The @option{--no-wchar-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
6957warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6958@code{wchar_t} size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6959linking of an object file using 32-bit @code{wchar_t} values with another
6960using 16-bit @code{wchar_t} values will not be diagnosed.
bf21ed78 6961
726150b7
NC
6962@cindex PIC_VENEER
6963@kindex --pic-veneer
6964The @samp{--pic-veneer} switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
6965ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary
6966is not PIC. This avoids problems on uClinux targets where
6967@samp{--emit-relocs} is used to generate relocatable binaries.
6968
6969@cindex STUB_GROUP_SIZE
6970@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6971The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
6972code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
6973perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away. The
6974placement of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is
a05a5b64 6975controlled by the command-line option @option{--stub-group-size=N}.
726150b7 6976The placement is important because a poor choice can create a need for
11e7fd74 6977duplicate stubs, increasing the code size. The linker will try to
726150b7
NC
6978group stubs together in order to reduce interruptions to the flow of
6979code, but it needs guidance as to how big these groups should be and
6980where they should be placed.
6981
6982The value of @samp{N}, the parameter to the
6983@option{--stub-group-size=} option controls where the stub groups are
07d72278 6984placed. If it is negative then all stubs are placed after the first
726150b7
NC
6985branch that needs them. If it is positive then the stubs can be
6986placed either before or after the branches that need them. If the
6987value of @samp{N} is 1 (either +1 or -1) then the linker will choose
6988exactly where to place groups of stubs, using its built in heuristics.
6989A value of @samp{N} greater than 1 (or smaller than -1) tells the
6990linker that a single group of stubs can service at most @samp{N} bytes
6991from the input sections.
6992
6993The default, if @option{--stub-group-size=} is not specified, is
6994@samp{N = +1}.
6995
1a51c1a4
NC
6996Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target
6997only, because it relies on object files properties not present
6998otherwise.
6999
1db37fe6
YG
7000@cindex Cortex-A8 erratum workaround
7001@kindex --fix-cortex-a8
7002@kindex --no-fix-cortex-a8
7003The @samp{--fix-cortex-a8} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum in certain Cortex-A8 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you are targeting the ARM v7-A architecture profile. It can be enabled otherwise by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a8}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a8}.
7004
7005The erratum only affects Thumb-2 code. Please contact ARM for further details.
7006
68fcca92
JW
7007@cindex Cortex-A53 erratum 835769 workaround
7008@kindex --fix-cortex-a53-835769
7009@kindex --no-fix-cortex-a53-835769
7010The @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769} switch enables a link-time workaround for erratum 835769 present on certain early revisions of Cortex-A53 processors. The workaround is disabled by default. It can be enabled by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a53-835769}.
7011
7012Please contact ARM for further details.
7013
1db37fe6
YG
7014@kindex --merge-exidx-entries
7015@kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
7016@cindex Merging exidx entries
7017The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent exidx entries in debuginfo.
7018
7019@kindex --long-plt
7020@cindex 32-bit PLT entries
7021The @samp{--long-plt} option enables the use of 16 byte PLT entries
7022which support up to 4Gb of code. The default is to use 12 byte PLT
7023entries which only support 512Mb of code.
7024
1f56df9d
JW
7025@kindex --no-apply-dynamic-relocs
7026@cindex AArch64 rela addend
7027The @samp{--no-apply-dynamic-relocs} option makes AArch64 linker do not apply
7028link-time values for dynamic relocations.
7029
4ba2ef8f
TP
7030@cindex Placement of SG veneers
7031All SG veneers are placed in the special output section @code{.gnu.sgstubs}.
a05a5b64 7032Its start address must be set, either with the command-line option
4ba2ef8f
TP
7033@samp{--section-start} or in a linker script, to indicate where to place these
7034veneers in memory.
7035
54ddd295
TP
7036@kindex --cmse-implib
7037@cindex Secure gateway import library
7038The @samp{--cmse-implib} option requests that the import libraries
7039specified by the @samp{--out-implib} and @samp{--in-implib} options are
7040secure gateway import libraries, suitable for linking a non-secure
7041executable against secure code as per ARMv8-M Security Extensions.
7042
0955507f
TP
7043@kindex --in-implib=@var{file}
7044@cindex Input import library
7045The @samp{--in-implib=file} specifies an input import library whose symbols
7046must keep the same address in the executable being produced. A warning is
7047given if no @samp{--out-implib} is given but new symbols have been introduced
7048in the executable that should be listed in its import library. Otherwise, if
7049@samp{--out-implib} is specified, the symbols are added to the output import
7050library. A warning is also given if some symbols present in the input import
7051library have disappeared from the executable. This option is only effective
7052for Secure Gateway import libraries, ie. when @samp{--cmse-implib} is
7053specified.
7054
36f63dca
NC
7055@ifclear GENERIC
7056@lowersections
7057@end ifclear
7058@end ifset
7059
7060@ifset HPPA
7061@ifclear GENERIC
7062@raisesections
7063@end ifclear
7064
7065@node HPPA ELF32
7066@section @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
7067@cindex HPPA multiple sub-space stubs
7068@kindex --multi-subspace
7069When generating a shared library, @command{ld} will by default generate
7070import stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.
7071The @samp{--multi-subspace} switch causes @command{ld} to generate export
7072stubs, and different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with
7073multiple sub-spaces.
7074
7075@cindex HPPA stub grouping
7076@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
7077Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by @command{ld} in
7078stub sections located between groups of input sections.
7079@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
7080sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
7081a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
7082the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
7083conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
7084prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
7085A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
7086branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
7087@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
7088@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
7089detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
7090positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
7091
7092Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
7093single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
7094create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
7095large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
7096
7097@ifclear GENERIC
7098@lowersections
7099@end ifclear
7100@end ifset
7101
7fb9f789
NC
7102@ifset M68K
7103@ifclear GENERIC
7104@raisesections
7105@end ifclear
7106
7107@node M68K
7108@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
7109
7110@cindex Motorola 68K GOT generation
7111@kindex --got=@var{type}
7112The @samp{--got=@var{type}} option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme.
7113The choices are @samp{single}, @samp{negative}, @samp{multigot} and
7114@samp{target}. When @samp{target} is selected the linker chooses
7115the default GOT generation scheme for the current target.
7116@samp{single} tells the linker to generate a single GOT with
7117entries only at non-negative offsets.
7118@samp{negative} instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with
7119entries at both negative and positive offsets. Not all environments
7120support such GOTs.
7121@samp{multigot} allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the
7122output file. All GOT references from a single input object
7123file access the same GOT, but references from different input object
7124files might access different GOTs. Not all environments support such GOTs.
7125
7126@ifclear GENERIC
7127@lowersections
7128@end ifclear
7129@end ifset
7130
833794fc
MR
7131@ifset MIPS
7132@ifclear GENERIC
7133@raisesections
7134@end ifclear
7135
7136@node MIPS
7137@section @command{ld} and the MIPS family
7138
7139@cindex MIPS microMIPS instruction choice selection
7140@kindex --insn32
7141@kindex --no-insn32
7142The @samp{--insn32} and @samp{--no-insn32} options control the choice of
7143microMIPS instructions used in code generated by the linker, such as that
7144in the PLT or lazy binding stubs, or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is
7145used, then the linker only uses 32-bit instruction encodings. By default
7146or if @samp{--no-insn32} is used, all instruction encodings are used,
7147including 16-bit ones where possible.
7148
8b10b0b3
MR
7149@cindex MIPS branch relocation check control
7150@kindex --ignore-branch-isa
7151@kindex --no-ignore-branch-isa
7152The @samp{--ignore-branch-isa} and @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} options
7153control branch relocation checks for invalid ISA mode transitions. If
7154@samp{--ignore-branch-isa} is used, then the linker accepts any branch
7155relocations and any ISA mode transition required is lost in relocation
7156calculation, except for some cases of @code{BAL} instructions which meet
7157relaxation conditions and are converted to equivalent @code{JALX}
7158instructions as the associated relocation is calculated. By default
7159or if @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} is used a check is made causing
7160the loss of an ISA mode transition to produce an error.
7161
833794fc
MR
7162@ifclear GENERIC
7163@lowersections
7164@end ifclear
7165@end ifset
7166
36f63dca
NC
7167@ifset MMIX
7168@ifclear GENERIC
7169@raisesections
7170@end ifclear
7171
7172@node MMIX
7173@section @code{ld} and MMIX
7174For MMIX, there is a choice of generating @code{ELF} object files or
7175@code{mmo} object files when linking. The simulator @code{mmix}
7176understands the @code{mmo} format. The binutils @code{objcopy} utility
7177can translate between the two formats.
7178
7179There is one special section, the @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section.
7180Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
7181registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special symbols,
7182equal to registers. In a final link, the start address of the
7183@samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section corresponds to the first allocated
7184global register multiplied by 8. Register @code{$255} is not included in
7185this section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the
7186symbol @code{Main} for @code{mmo} files.
7187
7a2de473
HPN
7188Global symbols with the prefix @code{__.MMIX.start.}, for example
7189@code{__.MMIX.start..text} and @code{__.MMIX.start..data} are special.
7190The default linker script uses these to set the default start address
7191of a section.
36f63dca
NC
7192
7193Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a section,
7194are left out from an mmo file.
7195
7196@ifclear GENERIC
7197@lowersections
7198@end ifclear
7199@end ifset
7200
7201@ifset MSP430
7202@ifclear GENERIC
7203@raisesections
7204@end ifclear
7205
7206@node MSP430
7207@section @code{ld} and MSP430
7208For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture. The flag @samp{-m [mpu type]}
7209will select an appropriate linker script for selected MPU type. (To get a list of known MPUs
7210just pass @samp{-m help} option to the linker).
7211
7212@cindex MSP430 extra sections
7213The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430 specific:
7214
7215@table @code
7216@item @samp{.vectors}
7217Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
7218
7219@item @samp{.bootloader}
7220Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable). Any code
7221in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
7222
7223@item @samp{.infomem}
7224Defines an information memory section (if applicable). Any code in
7225this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
7226
c0065db7 7227@item @samp{.infomemnobits}
36f63dca
NC
7228This is the same as the @samp{.infomem} section except that any code
7229in this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
7230
7231@item @samp{.noinit}
7232Denotes a portion of RAM located above @samp{.bss} section.
7233
c0065db7 7234The last two sections are used by gcc.
36f63dca
NC
7235@end table
7236
7ef3addb
JL
7237@table @option
7238@cindex MSP430 Options
7239@kindex --code-region
7240@item --code-region=[either,lower,upper,none]
7241This will transform .text* sections to [either,lower,upper].text* sections. The
7242argument passed to GCC for -mcode-region is propagated to the linker
7243using this option.
7244
7245@kindex --data-region
7246@item --data-region=[either,lower,upper,none]
7247This will transform .data*, .bss* and .rodata* sections to
7248[either,lower,upper].[data,bss,rodata]* sections. The argument passed to GCC
7249for -mdata-region is propagated to the linker using this option.
7250
7251@kindex --disable-sec-transformation
7252@item --disable-sec-transformation
7253Prevent the transformation of sections as specified by the @code{--code-region}
7254and @code{--data-region} options.
7255This is useful if you are compiling and linking using a single call to the GCC
7256wrapper, and want to compile the source files using -m[code,data]-region but
7257not transform the sections for prebuilt libraries and objects.
7258@end table
7259
36f63dca
NC
7260@ifclear GENERIC
7261@lowersections
7262@end ifclear
7263@end ifset
7264
35c08157
KLC
7265@ifset NDS32
7266@ifclear GENERIC
7267@raisesections
7268@end ifclear
7269
7270@node NDS32
7271@section @code{ld} and NDS32
7272@kindex relaxing on NDS32
7273For NDS32, there are some options to select relaxation behavior. The linker
7274relaxes objects according to these options.
7275
7276@table @code
7277@item @samp{--m[no-]fp-as-gp}
7278Disable/enable fp-as-gp relaxation.
7279
7280@item @samp{--mexport-symbols=FILE}
7281Exporting symbols and their address into FILE as linker script.
7282
7283@item @samp{--m[no-]ex9}
7284Disable/enable link-time EX9 relaxation.
7285
7286@item @samp{--mexport-ex9=FILE}
7287Export the EX9 table after linking.
7288
7289@item @samp{--mimport-ex9=FILE}
7290Import the Ex9 table for EX9 relaxation.
7291
7292@item @samp{--mupdate-ex9}
7293Update the existing EX9 table.
7294
7295@item @samp{--mex9-limit=NUM}
7296Maximum number of entries in the ex9 table.
7297
7298@item @samp{--mex9-loop-aware}
7299Avoid generating the EX9 instruction inside the loop.
7300
7301@item @samp{--m[no-]ifc}
7302Disable/enable the link-time IFC optimization.
7303
7304@item @samp{--mifc-loop-aware}
7305Avoid generating the IFC instruction inside the loop.
7306@end table
7307
7308@ifclear GENERIC
7309@lowersections
7310@end ifclear
7311@end ifset
7312
78058a5e
SL
7313@ifset NIOSII
7314@ifclear GENERIC
7315@raisesections
7316@end ifclear
7317
7318@node Nios II
7319@section @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
7320@cindex Nios II call relaxation
7321@kindex --relax on Nios II
7322
7323Call and immediate jump instructions on Nios II processors are limited to
7324transferring control to addresses in the same 256MB memory segment,
7325which may result in @command{ld} giving
7326@samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
7327The command-line option @option{--relax} enables the generation of
7328trampolines that can access the entire 32-bit address space for calls
7329outside the normal @code{call} and @code{jmpi} address range. These
7330trampolines are inserted at section boundaries, so may not themselves
7331be reachable if an input section and its associated call trampolines are
7332larger than 256MB.
7333
7334The @option{--relax} option is enabled by default unless @option{-r}
7335is also specified. You can disable trampoline generation by using the
7336@option{--no-relax} linker option. You can also disable this optimization
7337locally by using the @samp{set .noat} directive in assembly-language
7338source files, as the linker-inserted trampolines use the @code{at}
7339register as a temporary.
7340
7341Note that the linker @option{--relax} option is independent of assembler
7342relaxation options, and that using the GNU assembler's @option{-relax-all}
7343option interferes with the linker's more selective call instruction relaxation.
7344
7345@ifclear GENERIC
7346@lowersections
7347@end ifclear
7348@end ifset
7349
2a60a7a8
AM
7350@ifset POWERPC
7351@ifclear GENERIC
7352@raisesections
7353@end ifclear
7354
7355@node PowerPC ELF32
7356@section @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
7357@cindex PowerPC long branches
7358@kindex --relax on PowerPC
7359Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
7360displacement, which may result in @command{ld} giving
7361@samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
7362@samp{--relax} enables the generation of trampolines that can access
7363the entire 32-bit address space. These trampolines are inserted at
7364section boundaries, so may not themselves be reachable if an input
c8a1f254
NS
7365section exceeds 33M in size. You may combine @samp{-r} and
7366@samp{--relax} to add trampolines in a partial link. In that case
7367both branches to undefined symbols and inter-section branches are also
7368considered potentially out of range, and trampolines inserted.
2a60a7a8
AM
7369
7370@cindex PowerPC ELF32 options
7371@table @option
7372@cindex PowerPC PLT
7373@kindex --bss-plt
7374@item --bss-plt
7375Current PowerPC GCC accepts a @samp{-msecure-plt} option that
7376generates code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has
7377the security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
7378writable and no writable section ever being executable. PowerPC
7379@command{ld} will generate this layout, including stubs to access the
7380PLT, if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
7381compiled with @samp{-msecure-plt}. @samp{--bss-plt} forces the old
7382BSS PLT (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
7383
016687f8
AM
7384@kindex --secure-plt
7385@item --secure-plt
7386@command{ld} will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
7387@samp{-fpic} or @samp{-fPIC} code, but does not do so automatically
7388when linking non-PIC code. This option requests the new PLT and GOT
7389layout. A warning will be given if some object file requires the old
7390style BSS PLT.
7391
2a60a7a8
AM
7392@cindex PowerPC GOT
7393@kindex --sdata-got
7394@item --sdata-got
7395The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
7396sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement. The location of
7397@code{.plt} must change because the new secure PLT is an initialized
7398section while the old PLT is uninitialized. The reason for the
7399@code{.got} change is more subtle: The new placement allows
7400@code{.got} to be read-only in applications linked with
7401@samp{-z relro -z now}. However, this placement means that
7402@code{.sdata} cannot always be used in shared libraries, because the
7403PowerPC ABI accesses @code{.sdata} in shared libraries from the GOT
7404pointer. @samp{--sdata-got} forces the old GOT placement. PowerPC
7405GCC doesn't use @code{.sdata} in shared libraries, so this option is
7406really only useful for other compilers that may do so.
7407
7408@cindex PowerPC stub symbols
7409@kindex --emit-stub-syms
7410@item --emit-stub-syms
7411This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7412symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7413
7414@cindex PowerPC TLS optimization
7415@kindex --no-tls-optimize
7416@item --no-tls-optimize
7417PowerPC @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7418sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7419disable the optimization.
7420@end table
7421
7422@ifclear GENERIC
7423@lowersections
7424@end ifclear
7425@end ifset
7426
7427@ifset POWERPC64
7428@ifclear GENERIC
7429@raisesections
7430@end ifclear
7431
7432@node PowerPC64 ELF64
7433@section @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
7434
7435@cindex PowerPC64 ELF64 options
7436@table @option
7437@cindex PowerPC64 stub grouping
7438@kindex --stub-group-size
7439@item --stub-group-size
7440Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs and TOC adjusting stubs are placed
7441by @command{ld} in stub sections located between groups of input sections.
7442@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
7443sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
7444a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
7445the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
7446conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
7447prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
7448A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
7449branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
7450@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
7451@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
7452detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
7453positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
7454
7455Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
7456single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
7457create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
7458large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
7459
7460@cindex PowerPC64 stub symbols
7461@kindex --emit-stub-syms
7462@item --emit-stub-syms
7463This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7464symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7465
7466@cindex PowerPC64 dot symbols
7467@kindex --dotsyms
7468@kindex --no-dotsyms
95421fb9
AM
7469@item --dotsyms
7470@itemx --no-dotsyms
2a60a7a8
AM
7471These two options control how @command{ld} interprets version patterns
7472in a version script. Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
7473function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and a
7474code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (@samp{.}). To
7475properly version a function @samp{foo}, the version script thus needs
7476to control both @samp{foo} and @samp{.foo}. The option
7477@samp{--dotsyms}, on by default, automatically adds the required
7478dot-prefixed patterns. Use @samp{--no-dotsyms} to disable this
7479feature.
7480
7ae4ea7d
AM
7481@cindex PowerPC64 register save/restore functions
7482@kindex --save-restore-funcs
7483@kindex --no-save-restore-funcs
95421fb9
AM
7484@item --save-restore-funcs
7485@itemx --no-save-restore-funcs
7ae4ea7d
AM
7486These two options control whether PowerPC64 @command{ld} automatically
7487provides out-of-line register save and restore functions used by
7488@samp{-Os} code. The default is to provide any such referenced
7489function for a normal final link, and to not do so for a relocatable
7490link.
7491
2a60a7a8
AM
7492@cindex PowerPC64 TLS optimization
7493@kindex --no-tls-optimize
7494@item --no-tls-optimize
7495PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7496sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7497disable the optimization.
7498
7c9cf415
AM
7499@cindex PowerPC64 __tls_get_addr optimization
7500@kindex --tls-get-addr-optimize
7501@kindex --no-tls-get-addr-optimize
95421fb9
AM
7502@item --tls-get-addr-optimize
7503@itemx --no-tls-get-addr-optimize
7c9cf415
AM
7504These options control whether PowerPC64 @command{ld} uses a special
7505stub to call __tls_get_addr. PowerPC64 glibc 2.22 and later support
7506an optimization that allows the second and subsequent calls to
7507@code{__tls_get_addr} for a given symbol to be resolved by the special
7508stub without calling in to glibc. By default the linker enables this
7509option when glibc advertises the availability of __tls_get_addr_opt.
7510Forcing this option on when using an older glibc won't do much besides
7511slow down your applications, but may be useful if linking an
7512application against an older glibc with the expectation that it will
7513normally be used on systems having a newer glibc.
7514
2a60a7a8
AM
7515@cindex PowerPC64 OPD optimization
7516@kindex --no-opd-optimize
7517@item --no-opd-optimize
7518PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes @code{.opd} section entries
7519corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed by
e7fc76dd 7520the action of @samp{--gc-sections} or linker script @code{/DISCARD/}.
2a60a7a8
AM
7521Use this option to disable @code{.opd} optimization.
7522
7523@cindex PowerPC64 OPD spacing
7524@kindex --non-overlapping-opd
7525@item --non-overlapping-opd
7526Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
7527@code{.opd} entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
7528the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the next
7529entry. This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
7530
7531@cindex PowerPC64 TOC optimization
7532@kindex --no-toc-optimize
7533@item --no-toc-optimize
7534PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes unused @code{.toc} section
7535entries. Such entries are detected by examining relocations that
7536reference the TOC in code sections. A reloc in a deleted code section
7537marks a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section
7538marks a TOC word as needed. Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
7539relocs are also examined. TOC words marked as both needed and
7540unneeded will of course be kept. TOC words without any referencing
7541reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
7542discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word. This works
7543reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if assembly
7544code is used to insert TOC entries. Use this option to disable the
7545optimization.
7546
7547@cindex PowerPC64 multi-TOC
7548@kindex --no-multi-toc
7549@item --no-multi-toc
794e51c0
AM
7550If given any toc option besides @code{-mcmodel=medium} or
7551@code{-mcmodel=large}, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model
7552where TOC
2a60a7a8
AM
7553entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2. This limits the
7554total TOC size to 64K. PowerPC64 @command{ld} extends this limit by
7555grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for its
7556TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between inter-group
7557calls. @command{ld} does not split apart input sections, so cannot
7558help if a single input file has a @code{.toc} section that exceeds
755964K, most likely from linking multiple files with @command{ld -r}.
7560Use this option to turn off this feature.
794e51c0
AM
7561
7562@cindex PowerPC64 TOC sorting
7563@kindex --no-toc-sort
7564@item --no-toc-sort
7565By default, @command{ld} sorts TOC sections so that those whose file
7566happens to have a section called @code{.init} or @code{.fini} are
7567placed first, followed by TOC sections referenced by code generated
7568with PowerPC64 gcc's @code{-mcmodel=small}, and lastly TOC sections
7569referenced only by code generated with PowerPC64 gcc's
7570@code{-mcmodel=medium} or @code{-mcmodel=large} options. Doing this
7571results in better TOC grouping for multi-TOC. Use this option to turn
7572off this feature.
7573
7574@cindex PowerPC64 PLT stub alignment
7575@kindex --plt-align
7576@kindex --no-plt-align
7577@item --plt-align
7578@itemx --no-plt-align
7579Use these options to control whether individual PLT call stubs are
2420fff6
AM
7580aligned to a 32-byte boundary, or to the specified power of two
7581boundary when using @code{--plt-align=}. A negative value may be
7582specified to pad PLT call stubs so that they do not cross the
7583specified power of two boundary (or the minimum number of boundaries
7584if a PLT stub is so large that it must cross a boundary). By default
7585PLT call stubs are aligned to 32-byte boundaries.
794e51c0
AM
7586
7587@cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub static chain
7588@kindex --plt-static-chain
7589@kindex --no-plt-static-chain
7590@item --plt-static-chain
7591@itemx --no-plt-static-chain
7592Use these options to control whether PLT call stubs load the static
7593chain pointer (r11). @code{ld} defaults to not loading the static
7594chain since there is never any need to do so on a PLT call.
7595
7596@cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub thread safety
7597@kindex --plt-thread-safe
7598@kindex --no-plt-thread-safe
7599@item --plt-thread-safe
1be5d8d3 7600@itemx --no-plt-thread-safe
794e51c0
AM
7601With power7's weakly ordered memory model, it is possible when using
7602lazy binding for ld.so to update a plt entry in one thread and have
7603another thread see the individual plt entry words update in the wrong
7604order, despite ld.so carefully writing in the correct order and using
7605memory write barriers. To avoid this we need some sort of read
7606barrier in the call stub, or use LD_BIND_NOW=1. By default, @code{ld}
7607looks for calls to commonly used functions that create threads, and if
7608seen, adds the necessary barriers. Use these options to change the
7609default behaviour.
8b5f1ed8
AM
7610
7611@cindex PowerPC64 ELFv2 PLT localentry optimization
7612@kindex --plt-localentry
7613@kindex --no-plt-localentry
7614@item --plt-localentry
7615@itemx --no-localentry
7616ELFv2 functions with localentry:0 are those with a single entry point,
7617ie. global entry == local entry, and that have no requirement on r2
7618(the TOC/GOT pointer) or r12, and guarantee r2 is unchanged on return.
7619Such an external function can be called via the PLT without saving r2
7620or restoring it on return, avoiding a common load-hit-store for small
7621functions. The optimization is attractive, with up to 40% reduction
7622in execution time for a small function, but can result in symbol
d44c746a
AM
7623interposition failures. Also, minor changes in a shared library,
7624including system libraries, can cause a function that was localentry:0
7625to become localentry:8. This will result in a dynamic loader
7626complaint and failure to run. The option is experimental, use with
7627care. @option{--no-plt-localentry} is the default.
2a60a7a8
AM
7628@end table
7629
7630@ifclear GENERIC
7631@lowersections
7632@end ifclear
7633@end ifset
7634
b4cbbe8f
AK
7635@ifset S/390
7636@ifclear GENERIC
7637@raisesections
7638@end ifclear
7639
7640@node S/390 ELF
7641@section @command{ld} and S/390 ELF Support
7642
7643@cindex S/390 ELF options
7644@table @option
7645
7646@cindex S/390
7647@kindex --s390-pgste
7648@item --s390-pgste
7649This option marks the result file with a @code{PT_S390_PGSTE}
7650segment. The Linux kernel is supposed to allocate 4k page tables for
7651binaries marked that way.
7652@end table
7653
7654@ifclear GENERIC
7655@lowersections
7656@end ifclear
7657@end ifset
7658
49fa1e15
AM
7659@ifset SPU
7660@ifclear GENERIC
7661@raisesections
7662@end ifclear
7663
7664@node SPU ELF
7665@section @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
7666
7667@cindex SPU ELF options
7668@table @option
7669
7670@cindex SPU plugins
7671@kindex --plugin
7672@item --plugin
7673This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
7674
7675@cindex SPU overlays
7676@kindex --no-overlays
7677@item --no-overlays
7678Normally, @command{ld} recognizes calls to functions within overlay
7679regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
7680@command{ld} also provides a built-in overlay manager. This option
7681turns off all this special overlay handling.
7682
7683@cindex SPU overlay stub symbols
7684@kindex --emit-stub-syms
7685@item --emit-stub-syms
7686This option causes @command{ld} to label overlay stubs with a local
7687symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7688
7689@cindex SPU extra overlay stubs
7690@kindex --extra-overlay-stubs
7691@item --extra-overlay-stubs
7692This option causes @command{ld} to add overlay call stubs on all
7693function calls out of overlay regions. Normally stubs are not added
7694on calls to non-overlay regions.
7695
7696@cindex SPU local store size
7697@kindex --local-store=lo:hi
7698@item --local-store=lo:hi
7699@command{ld} usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in
7700the address range 0 to 256k. This option may be used to change the
7701range. Disable the check entirely with @option{--local-store=0:0}.
7702
c0065db7 7703@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
7704@kindex --stack-analysis
7705@item --stack-analysis
7706SPU local store space is limited. Over-allocation of stack space
7707unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
7708under-allocation results in runtime failures. If given this option,
7709@command{ld} will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.
7710@command{ld} does this by examining symbols in code sections to
7711determine the extents of functions, and looking at function prologues
7712for stack adjusting instructions. A call-graph is created by looking
7713for relocations on branch instructions. The graph is then searched
7714for the maximum stack usage path. Note that this analysis does not
7715find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle recursion
7716and other cycles in the call graph. Stack usage may be
7717under-estimated if your code makes such calls. Also, stack usage for
7718dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected. If a link map
7719is requested, detailed information about each function's stack usage
7720and calls will be given.
7721
c0065db7 7722@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
7723@kindex --emit-stack-syms
7724@item --emit-stack-syms
7725This option, if given along with @option{--stack-analysis} will result
7726in @command{ld} emitting stack sizing symbols for each function.
7727These take the form @code{__stack_<function_name>} for global
7728functions, and @code{__stack_<number>_<function_name>} for static
7729functions. @code{<number>} is the section id in hex. The value of
7730such symbols is the stack requirement for the corresponding function.
7731The symbol size will be zero, type @code{STT_NOTYPE}, binding
c0065db7 7732@code{STB_LOCAL}, and section @code{SHN_ABS}.
49fa1e15
AM
7733@end table
7734
7735@ifclear GENERIC
7736@lowersections
7737@end ifclear
7738@end ifset
7739
36f63dca
NC
7740@ifset TICOFF
7741@ifclear GENERIC
7742@raisesections
7743@end ifclear
7744
7745@node TI COFF
7746@section @command{ld}'s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
7747@cindex TI COFF versions
7748@kindex --format=@var{version}
7749The @samp{--format} switch allows selection of one of the various
7750TI COFF versions. The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are
7751also supported. The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order
7752format; @command{ld} will read any version or byte order, but the output
7753header format depends on the default specified by the specific target.
7754
7755@ifclear GENERIC
7756@lowersections
7757@end ifclear
7758@end ifset
7759
2ca22b03
NC
7760@ifset WIN32
7761@ifclear GENERIC
7762@raisesections
7763@end ifclear
7764
7765@node WIN32
7766@section @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
7767
c0065db7 7768This section describes some of the win32 specific @command{ld} issues.
a05a5b64
TP
7769See @ref{Options,,Command-line Options} for detailed description of the
7770command-line options mentioned here.
2ca22b03
NC
7771
7772@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
7773@cindex import libraries
7774@item import libraries
69da35b5 7775The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
2ca22b03 7776libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's. They are
69da35b5
NC
7777regular static archives and are handled as any other static
7778archive. The cygwin and mingw ports of @command{ld} have specific
2ca22b03 7779support for creating such libraries provided with the
a05a5b64 7780@samp{--out-implib} command-line option.
2ca22b03 7781
c0065db7
RM
7782@item exporting DLL symbols
7783@cindex exporting DLL symbols
dc8465bf
NC
7784The cygwin/mingw @command{ld} has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
7785
7786@table @emph
7787@item using auto-export functionality
7788@cindex using auto-export functionality
7789By default @command{ld} exports symbols with the auto-export functionality,
a05a5b64 7790which is controlled by the following command-line options:
dc8465bf 7791
0a5d968e
NC
7792@itemize
7793@item --export-all-symbols [This is the default]
7794@item --exclude-symbols
7795@item --exclude-libs
e1c37eb5 7796@item --exclude-modules-for-implib
09e2aba4 7797@item --version-script
0a5d968e
NC
7798@end itemize
7799
09e2aba4
DK
7800When auto-export is in operation, @command{ld} will export all the non-local
7801(global and common) symbols it finds in a DLL, with the exception of a few
7802symbols known to belong to the system's runtime and libraries. As it will
7803often not be desirable to export all of a DLL's symbols, which may include
7804private functions that are not part of any public interface, the command-line
9d5777a3 7805options listed above may be used to filter symbols out from the list for
09e2aba4
DK
7806exporting. The @samp{--output-def} option can be used in order to see the
7807final list of exported symbols with all exclusions taken into effect.
7808
7809If @samp{--export-all-symbols} is not given explicitly on the
0a5d968e
NC
7810command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be @emph{disabled}
7811if either of the following are true:
7812
7813@itemize
7814@item A DEF file is used.
7815@item Any symbol in any object file was marked with the __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
7816@end itemize
dc8465bf 7817
c0065db7
RM
7818@item using a DEF file
7819@cindex using a DEF file
dc8465bf
NC
7820Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file. A DEF file is
7821an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which should be
7822exported when a dll is created. Usually it is named @samp{<dll
7823name>.def} and is added as any other object file to the linker's
0a5d968e 7824command line. The file's name must end in @samp{.def} or @samp{.DEF}.
dc8465bf
NC
7825
7826@example
7827gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
7828@end example
7829
0a5d968e
NC
7830Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior, unless the
7831@samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7832
dc8465bf
NC
7833Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called @samp{xyz.dll}:
7834
7835@example
4b5bd4e7 7836LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
dc8465bf
NC
7837
7838EXPORTS
7839foo
7840bar
7841_bar = bar
4b5bd4e7
DS
7842another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
7843var1 DATA
7fcab871
KT
7844doo = foo == foo2
7845eoo DATA == var1
c0065db7 7846@end example
dc8465bf 7847
7fcab871 7848This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address and seven
4b5bd4e7
DS
7849symbols in the export table. The third exported symbol @code{_bar} is an
7850alias for the second. The fourth symbol, @code{another_foo} is resolved
7851by "forwarding" to another module and treating it as an alias for
7852@code{afoo} exported from the DLL @samp{abc.dll}. The final symbol
7fcab871
KT
7853@code{var1} is declared to be a data object. The @samp{doo} symbol in
7854export library is an alias of @samp{foo}, which gets the string name
7855in export table @samp{foo2}. The @samp{eoo} symbol is an data export
7856symbol, which gets in export table the name @samp{var1}.
4b5bd4e7 7857
6b31ad16
DS
7858The optional @code{LIBRARY <name>} command indicates the @emph{internal}
7859name of the output DLL. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix,
7860the default library suffix, @samp{.DLL} is appended.
7861
b45619c0
NC
7862When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather than a
7863library, the @code{NAME <name>} command should be used instead of
6b31ad16 7864@code{LIBRARY}. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix, the default
c0065db7 7865executable suffix, @samp{.EXE} is appended.
6b31ad16
DS
7866
7867With either @code{LIBRARY <name>} or @code{NAME <name>} the optional
7868specification @code{BASE = <number>} may be used to specify a
c0065db7 7869non-default base address for the image.
6b31ad16
DS
7870
7871If neither @code{LIBRARY <name>} nor @code{NAME <name>} is specified,
a2877985
DS
7872or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the same as the
7873filename specified on the command line.
6b31ad16 7874
4b5bd4e7
DS
7875The complete specification of an export symbol is:
7876
7877@example
7878EXPORTS
7879 ( ( ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
7880 | ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
7fcab871 7881 [ @@ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] [== <name3>] ) *
c0065db7 7882@end example
4b5bd4e7
DS
7883
7884Declares @samp{<name1>} as an exported symbol from the DLL, or declares
7885@samp{<name1>} as an exported alias for @samp{<name2>}; or declares
7886@samp{<name1>} as a "forward" alias for the symbol
7887@samp{<external-name>} in the DLL @samp{<module-name>}.
7888Optionally, the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
7fcab871
KT
7889@samp{<integer>} alias. The optional @samp{<name3>} is the to be used
7890string in import/export table for the symbol.
4b5bd4e7
DS
7891
7892The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
7893
7894@code{NONAME}: Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export table. It
7895will still be exported by its ordinal alias (either the value specified
7896by the .def specification or, otherwise, the value assigned by the
7897linker). The symbol name, however, does remain visible in the import
7898library (if any), unless @code{PRIVATE} is also specified.
7899
7900@code{DATA}: The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a function.
7901The import lib will export only an indirect reference to @code{foo} as
7902the symbol @code{_imp__foo} (ie, @code{foo} must be resolved as
7903@code{*_imp__foo}).
7904
7905@code{CONSTANT}: Like @code{DATA}, but put the undecorated @code{foo} as
7906well as @code{_imp__foo} into the import library. Both refer to the
7907read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not to the
7908variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user code fails to add
7909the @code{dllimport} attribute and also fails to explicitly add the
7910extra indirection that the use of the attribute enforces, the
7911application will behave unexpectedly.
7912
7913@code{PRIVATE}: Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do not put
7914it into the static import library used to resolve imports at link time. The
7915symbol can still be imported using the @code{LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress}
de194d85 7916API at runtime or by using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to
4b5bd4e7 7917the DLL without an import library.
c0065db7 7918
4b5bd4e7
DS
7919See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full specification of
7920other DEF file statements
dc8465bf
NC
7921
7922@cindex creating a DEF file
7923While linking a shared dll, @command{ld} is able to create a DEF file
a05a5b64 7924with the @samp{--output-def <file>} command-line option.
0a5d968e
NC
7925
7926@item Using decorations
7927@cindex Using decorations
7928Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the source code
7929itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol to be exported is
7930declared as:
7931
7932@example
7933__declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
7934__declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
7935@end example
7936
7937All such symbols will be exported from the DLL. If, however,
7938any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated in
7939this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is disabled, unless
7940the @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7941
7942Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must @emph{not}
c0065db7 7943decorate them with dllexport. Instead, they should use dllimport,
0a5d968e
NC
7944instead:
7945
7946@example
7947__declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
7948__declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
7949@end example
7950
c0065db7
RM
7951This complicates the structure of library header files, because
7952when included by the library itself the header must declare the
0a5d968e
NC
7953variables and functions as dllexport, but when included by client
7954code the header must declare them as dllimport. There are a number
c0065db7 7955of idioms that are typically used to do this; often client code can
0a5d968e
NC
7956omit the __declspec() declaration completely. See
7957@samp{--enable-auto-import} and @samp{automatic data imports} for more
b45619c0 7958information.
c0065db7 7959@end table
dc8465bf 7960
2ca22b03
NC
7961@cindex automatic data imports
7962@item automatic data imports
7963The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls only
69da35b5 7964by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which let the
2ca22b03 7965compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal with this
c0065db7 7966issue. This increases the effort necessary to port existing Un*x
69da35b5 7967code to these platforms, especially for large
2ca22b03 7968c++ libraries and applications. The auto-import feature, which was
c0065db7 7969initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
b45619c0 7970decorations to achieve a behavior that conforms to that on POSIX/Un*x
c0065db7 7971platforms. This feature is enabled with the @samp{--enable-auto-import}
69da35b5
NC
7972command-line option, although it is enabled by default on cygwin/mingw.
7973The @samp{--enable-auto-import} option itself now serves mainly to
7974suppress any warnings that are ordinarily emitted when linked objects
7975trigger the feature's use.
7976
c0065db7 7977auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
69da35b5
NC
7978additional assistance. Sometimes, you will see this message
7979
c0065db7 7980"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
69da35b5
NC
7981documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
7982
c0065db7
RM
7983The @samp{--enable-auto-import} documentation explains why this error
7984occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this difficulty.
7985One of these methods is the @emph{runtime pseudo-relocs} feature, described
69da35b5
NC
7986below.
7987
7988@cindex runtime pseudo-relocation
c0065db7
RM
7989For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or classes),
7990object files typically contain a base address for the variable and an
7991offset (@emph{addend}) within the variable--to specify a particular
7992field or public member, for instance. Unfortunately, the runtime loader used
7993in win32 environments is incapable of fixing these references at runtime
69da35b5 7994without the additional information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.
c0065db7 7995The standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve these
69da35b5
NC
7996references.
7997
c0065db7
RM
7998The @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} switch allows these references to
7999be resolved without error, while leaving the task of adjusting the references
8000themselves (with their non-zero addends) to specialized code provided by the
8001runtime environment. Recent versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and
8002compilers provide this runtime support; older versions do not. However, the
8003support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the compiled result will
69da35b5
NC
8004run without error on an older system.
8005
c0065db7
RM
8006@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is not the default; it must be explicitly
8007enabled as needed.
2ca22b03
NC
8008
8009@cindex direct linking to a dll
8010@item direct linking to a dll
8011The cygwin/mingw ports of @command{ld} support the direct linking,
8012including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
69da35b5 8013libraries. This is much faster and uses much less memory than does the
b45619c0 8014traditional import library method, especially when linking large
c0065db7
RM
8015libraries or applications. When @command{ld} creates an import lib, each
8016function or variable exported from the dll is stored in its own bfd, even
8017though a single bfd could contain many exports. The overhead involved in
69da35b5 8018storing, loading, and processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
c0065db7 8019tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against particularly
69da35b5
NC
8020large or complex libraries when using import libs.
8021
c0065db7 8022Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches other than
69da35b5 8023@samp{-L} and @samp{-l}, because @command{ld} already searches for a number
c0065db7 8024of names to match each library. All that is needed from the developer's
69da35b5
NC
8025perspective is an understanding of this search, in order to force ld to
8026select the dll instead of an import library.
8027
2ca22b03 8028
69da35b5
NC
8029For instance, when ld is called with the argument @samp{-lxxx} it will attempt
8030to find, in the first directory of its search path,
2ca22b03
NC
8031
8032@example
45e948fe
NC
8033libxxx.dll.a
8034xxx.dll.a
8035libxxx.a
8036xxx.lib
f6c4d4b1 8037libxxx.lib
69da35b5 8038cygxxx.dll (*)
45e948fe
NC
8039libxxx.dll
8040xxx.dll
2ca22b03
NC
8041@end example
8042
69da35b5
NC
8043before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
8044
c0065db7
RM
8045(*) Actually, this is not @samp{cygxxx.dll} but in fact is @samp{<prefix>xxx.dll},
8046where @samp{<prefix>} is set by the @command{ld} option
8047@samp{--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>}. In the case of cygwin, the standard gcc spec
8048file includes @samp{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}, so in effect we actually search for
69da35b5
NC
8049@samp{cygxxx.dll}.
8050
c0065db7
RM
8051Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may use other
8052@samp{<prefix>}es, although at present only cygwin makes use of this feature. It
69da35b5
NC
8053was originally intended to help avoid name conflicts among dll's built for the
8054various win32/un*x environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
8055could coexist on the same machine.
8056
2ca22b03
NC
8057The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a @samp{bin} directory for
8058applications and dll's and a @samp{lib} directory for the import
69da35b5 8059libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
2ca22b03
NC
8060
8061@example
8062bin/
8063 cygxxx.dll
8064lib/
8065 libxxx.dll.a (in case of dll's)
c0065db7 8066 libxxx.a (in case of static archive)
2ca22b03
NC
8067@end example
8068
c0065db7
RM
8069Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
8070done two ways:
2ca22b03
NC
8071
80721. Use the dll directly by adding the @samp{bin} path to the link line
8073@example
8074gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
c0065db7 8075@end example
2ca22b03 8076
69da35b5
NC
8077However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their names
8078(@samp{cygncurses-5.dll}) this will often fail, unless one specifies
8079@samp{-L../bin -lncurses-5} to include the version. Import libs are generally
8080not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
8081
2ca22b03
NC
80822. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the @samp{lib}
8083directory according to the above mentioned search pattern. This
8084should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
8085making the app/dll.
8086
8087@example
8088ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
c0065db7 8089@end example
2ca22b03
NC
8090
8091Then you can link without any make environment changes.
8092
8093@example
8094gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
c0065db7 8095@end example
69da35b5
NC
8096
8097This technique also avoids the version number problems, because the following is
8098perfectly legal
8099
8100@example
8101bin/
8102 cygxxx-5.dll
8103lib/
c0065db7 8104 libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
69da35b5
NC
8105@end example
8106
dc8465bf 8107Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
69da35b5
NC
8108even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
8109@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is used.
8110
8111Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might justifiably
45e948fe 8112wonder why import libraries are used at all. There are three reasons:
69da35b5
NC
8113
81141. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did @emph{not}
8115work with auto-imported data.
8116
dc8465bf
NC
81172. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within the
8118import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for indirection
8119symbols that point to the exports of a dll). Again, the import lib
8120for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability, and it is not
8121possible to do this without an import lib.
69da35b5 8122
45e948fe
NC
81233. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib. This is
8124critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32 API)
8125in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases of their
8126stdcall-decorated assembly names.
8127
69da35b5 8128So, import libs are not going away. But the ability to replace
c0065db7
RM
8129true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of)
8130a dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
8131binutils makes available to the win32 developer. Given the
69da35b5
NC
8132massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
8133requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
8134will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
dc8465bf 8135
c0065db7 8136@item symbol aliasing
dc8465bf 8137@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
8138@item adding additional names
8139Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional names.
dc8465bf
NC
8140A symbol @samp{foo} will be exported as @samp{foo}, but it can also be
8141exported as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the DEF file
8142when creating the dll. This will affect also the optional created
c0065db7 8143import library. Consider the following DEF file:
dc8465bf 8144
c0065db7 8145@example
dc8465bf
NC
8146LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
8147
8148EXPORTS
c0065db7 8149foo
dc8465bf 8150_foo = foo
c0065db7 8151@end example
dc8465bf
NC
8152
8153The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the symbol @samp{foo} to @samp{_foo}.
8154
8155Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in the
8156source code using the "weak" attribute:
8157
c0065db7
RM
8158@example
8159void foo () @{ /* Do something. */; @}
dc8465bf 8160void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
c0065db7 8161@end example
dc8465bf
NC
8162
8163See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and weak
8164symbols.
8165
8166@item renaming symbols
8167Sometimes it is useful to rename exports. For instance, the cygwin
c0065db7 8168kernel does this regularly. A symbol @samp{_foo} can be exported as
dc8465bf
NC
8169@samp{foo} but not as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the
8170DEF file. (This will also affect the import library, if it is
c0065db7 8171created). In the following example:
dc8465bf 8172
c0065db7 8173@example
dc8465bf
NC
8174LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
8175
8176EXPORTS
8177_foo = foo
c0065db7 8178@end example
dc8465bf
NC
8179
8180The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the exported symbol @samp{foo} to
8181@samp{_foo}.
c0065db7 8182@end table
dc8465bf 8183
0a5d968e 8184Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
a05a5b64 8185unless the @samp{--export-all-symbols} command-line option is used.
0a5d968e 8186If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
c0065db7
RM
8187@emph{all} desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols
8188that are not being renamed, and do @emph{not} use the
8189@samp{--export-all-symbols} option. If you list only the
8190renamed symbols in the DEF file, and use @samp{--export-all-symbols}
8191to handle the other symbols, then the both the new names @emph{and}
8192the original names for the renamed symbols will be exported.
8193In effect, you'd be aliasing those symbols, not renaming them,
0a5d968e 8194which is probably not what you wanted.
c87db184
CF
8195
8196@cindex weak externals
8197@item weak externals
8198The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols called
8199weak externals. When a weak symbol is linked and the symbol is not
8200defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some other symbol. There
8201are three variants of weak externals:
8202@itemize
8203@item Definition is searched for in objects and libraries, historically
8204called lazy externals.
8205@item Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in libraries.
8206This form is not presently implemented.
8207@item No search; the symbol is an alias. This form is not presently
8208implemented.
8209@end itemize
8210As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate symbol
8211are supported. If the symbol is undefined when linking, the symbol
8212uses a default value.
c1711530
DK
8213
8214@cindex aligned common symbols
8215@item aligned common symbols
8216As a GNU extension to the PE file format, it is possible to specify the
8217desired alignment for a common symbol. This information is conveyed from
8218the assembler or compiler to the linker by means of GNU-specific commands
8219carried in the object file's @samp{.drectve} section, which are recognized
8220by @command{ld} and respected when laying out the common symbols. Native
8221tools will be able to process object files employing this GNU extension,
8222but will fail to respect the alignment instructions, and may issue noisy
8223warnings about unknown linker directives.
5063daf7 8224
2ca22b03
NC
8225@end table
8226
8227@ifclear GENERIC
8228@lowersections
8229@end ifclear
8230@end ifset
8231
e0001a05
NC
8232@ifset XTENSA
8233@ifclear GENERIC
8234@raisesections
8235@end ifclear
8236
8237@node Xtensa
8238@section @code{ld} and Xtensa Processors
8239
8240@cindex Xtensa processors
8241The default @command{ld} behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
8242@code{SECTIONS} commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
8243specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
8244keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets. For
8245example, with the command:
8246
8247@smallexample
8248SECTIONS
8249@{
8250 .text : @{
8251 *(.literal .text)
8252 @}
8253@}
8254@end smallexample
8255
8256@noindent
8257@command{ld} may interleave some of the @code{.literal}
8258and @code{.text} sections from different object files to ensure that the
8259literal pools are within the range of PC-relative load offsets. A valid
8260interleaving might place the @code{.literal} sections from an initial
8261group of files followed by the @code{.text} sections of that group of
8262files. Then, the @code{.literal} sections from the rest of the files
8263and the @code{.text} sections from the rest of the files would follow.
e0001a05 8264
43cd72b9 8265@cindex @option{--relax} on Xtensa
e0001a05 8266@cindex relaxing on Xtensa
43cd72b9
BW
8267Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of @command{ld} and
8268provides two important link-time optimizations. The first optimization
8269is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size. A redundant
8270literal will be removed and all the @code{L32R} instructions that use it
8271will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
8272location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
8273the @code{L32R} instructions. The second optimization is to remove
8274unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated ``longcall'' sequences of
8275@code{L32R}/@code{CALLX@var{n}} when the target functions are within
8276range of direct @code{CALL@var{n}} instructions.
8277
8278For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be optimized
8279to a direct call, the linker will change the @code{CALLX@var{n}}
8280instruction to a @code{CALL@var{n}} instruction, remove the @code{L32R}
8281instruction, and remove the literal referenced by the @code{L32R}
8282instruction if it is not used for anything else. Removing the
8283@code{L32R} instruction always reduces code size but can potentially
8284hurt performance by changing the alignment of subsequent branch targets.
8285By default, the linker will always preserve alignments, either by
8286switching some instructions between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent
8287density instructions or by inserting a no-op in place of the @code{L32R}
8288instruction that was removed. If code size is more important than
8289performance, the @option{--size-opt} option can be used to prevent the
8290linker from widening density instructions or inserting no-ops, except in
8291a few cases where no-ops are required for correctness.
8292
8293The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
8294control the linker:
8295
8296@cindex Xtensa options
8297@table @option
43cd72b9
BW
8298@item --size-opt
8299When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code size
8300more than performance. With this option, the linker will not insert
8301no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch target
8302alignment. There may still be some cases where no-ops are required to
8303preserve the correctness of the code.
8304@end table
e0001a05
NC
8305
8306@ifclear GENERIC
8307@lowersections
8308@end ifclear
8309@end ifset
8310
252b5132
RH
8311@ifclear SingleFormat
8312@node BFD
8313@chapter BFD
8314
8315@cindex back end
8316@cindex object file management
8317@cindex object formats available
8318@kindex objdump -i
8319The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
8320These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
8321object files whatever the object file format. A different object file
8322format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
8323it to the library. To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
8324associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
8325object file formats available. You can use @code{objdump -i}
8326(@pxref{objdump,,objdump,binutils.info,The GNU Binary Utilities}) to
8327list all the formats available for your configuration.
8328
8329@cindex BFD requirements
8330@cindex requirements for BFD
8331As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between
8332several conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing
8333BFD design was efficiency: any time used converting between
8334formats is time which would not have been spent had BFD not
8335been involved. This is partly offset by abstraction payback; since
8336BFD simplifies applications and back ends, more time and care
8337may be spent optimizing algorithms for a greater speed.
8338
8339One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in
8340mind is the potential for information loss. There are two places where
8341useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
8342conversion and during output. @xref{BFD information loss}.
8343
8344@menu
8345* BFD outline:: How it works: an outline of BFD
8346@end menu
8347
8348@node BFD outline
36f63dca 8349@section How It Works: An Outline of BFD
252b5132
RH
8350@cindex opening object files
8351@include bfdsumm.texi
8352@end ifclear
8353
8354@node Reporting Bugs
8355@chapter Reporting Bugs
ff5dcc92
SC
8356@cindex bugs in @command{ld}
8357@cindex reporting bugs in @command{ld}
252b5132 8358
ff5dcc92 8359Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{ld} reliable.
252b5132
RH
8360
8361Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or
8362it may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is
ff5dcc92 8363to help the entire community by making the next version of @command{ld}
252b5132 8364work better. Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of
ff5dcc92 8365@command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
8366
8367In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
8368information that enables us to fix the bug.
8369
8370@menu
8371* Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
8372* Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
8373@end menu
8374
8375@node Bug Criteria
36f63dca 8376@section Have You Found a Bug?
252b5132
RH
8377@cindex bug criteria
8378
8379If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
8380
8381@itemize @bullet
8382@cindex fatal signal
8383@cindex linker crash
8384@cindex crash of linker
8385@item
8386If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
ff5dcc92 8387@command{ld} bug. Reliable linkers never crash.
252b5132
RH
8388
8389@cindex error on valid input
8390@item
ff5dcc92 8391If @command{ld} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
252b5132
RH
8392
8393@cindex invalid input
8394@item
ff5dcc92 8395If @command{ld} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
252b5132
RH
8396may be a bug. In the general case, the linker can not verify that
8397object files are correct.
8398
8399@item
8400If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
ff5dcc92 8401improvement of @command{ld} are welcome in any case.
252b5132
RH
8402@end itemize
8403
8404@node Bug Reporting
36f63dca 8405@section How to Report Bugs
252b5132 8406@cindex bug reports
ff5dcc92 8407@cindex @command{ld} bugs, reporting
252b5132
RH
8408
8409A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu}
ff5dcc92 8410products. If you obtained @command{ld} from a support organization, we
252b5132
RH
8411recommend you contact that organization first.
8412
8413You can find contact information for many support companies and
8414individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
8415distribution.
8416
ad22bfe8 8417@ifset BUGURL
ff5dcc92 8418Otherwise, send bug reports for @command{ld} to
ad22bfe8
JM
8419@value{BUGURL}.
8420@end ifset
252b5132
RH
8421
8422The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
8423@strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
8424fact or leave it out, state it!
8425
8426Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
8427problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
b553b183
NC
8428assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not
8429matter. Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps
8430the bug is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the
8431location where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name
8432were different, the contents of that location would fool the linker
8433into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and give a
8434specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
c0065db7 8435and the most helpful.
b553b183
NC
8436
8437Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
8438the bug if it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports
8439on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
252b5132
RH
8440
8441Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
36f63dca
NC
8442bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
8443respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
8444You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
252b5132
RH
8445
8446To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
8447
8448@itemize @bullet
8449@item
ff5dcc92 8450The version of @command{ld}. @command{ld} announces it if you start it with
252b5132
RH
8451the @samp{--version} argument.
8452
8453Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
ff5dcc92 8454the bug in the current version of @command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
8455
8456@item
ff5dcc92 8457Any patches you may have applied to the @command{ld} source, including any
252b5132
RH
8458patches made to the @code{BFD} library.
8459
8460@item
8461The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
8462version number.
8463
8464@item
ff5dcc92 8465What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{ld}---e.g.
252b5132
RH
8466``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
8467
8468@item
8469The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
8470observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important,
8471list them all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is
8472sufficient.
8473
8474If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
8475and then we might not encounter the bug.
8476
8477@item
8478A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce the
b553b183
NC
8479bug. It is generally most helpful to send the actual object files
8480provided that they are reasonably small. Say no more than 10K. For
8481bigger files you can either make them available by FTP or HTTP or else
8482state that you are willing to send the object file(s) to whomever
8483requests them. (Note - your email will be going to a mailing list, so
8484we do not want to clog it up with large attachments). But small
8485attachments are best.
252b5132
RH
8486
8487If the source files were assembled using @code{gas} or compiled using
8488@code{gcc}, then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
8489object files. In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
8490@code{gas} or @code{gcc} was used to produce the object files. Also say
8491how @code{gas} or @code{gcc} were configured.
8492
8493@item
8494A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
8495incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
8496
ff5dcc92 8497Of course, if the bug is that @command{ld} gets a fatal signal, then we
252b5132
RH
8498will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might
8499not notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us
8500a chance to make a mistake.
8501
8502Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
8503say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your
b45619c0 8504copy of @command{ld} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the
252b5132
RH
8505C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash
8506and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours
8507fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not happening for us. If
8508you had not told us to expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw
8509any conclusion from our observations.
8510
8511@item
ff5dcc92 8512If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{ld} source, send us context
252b5132
RH
8513diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or
8514@samp{-p} option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.
ff5dcc92 8515If you even discuss something in the @command{ld} source, refer to it by
252b5132
RH
8516context, not by line number.
8517
8518The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
8519sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
8520@end itemize
8521
8522Here are some things that are not necessary:
8523
8524@itemize @bullet
8525@item
8526A description of the envelope of the bug.
8527
8528Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
8529which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
8530changes will not affect it.
8531
8532This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
8533will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
8534with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
8535We recommend that you save your time for something else.
8536
8537Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
8538of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
8539output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
8540less time, and so on.
8541
8542However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
8543report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
8544
8545@item
8546A patch for the bug.
8547
8548A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
8549the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
8550a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
8551to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
8552
ff5dcc92 8553Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{ld} it is very hard to
252b5132
RH
8554construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
8555through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be
8556able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is
8557fixed.
8558
8559And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
8560patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
8561help us to understand.
8562
8563@item
8564A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
8565
8566Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
8567things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
8568@end itemize
8569
8570@node MRI
8571@appendix MRI Compatible Script Files
8572@cindex MRI compatibility
ff5dcc92
SC
8573To aid users making the transition to @sc{gnu} @command{ld} from the MRI
8574linker, @command{ld} can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an
252b5132
RH
8575alternative to the more general-purpose linker scripting language
8576described in @ref{Scripts}. MRI compatible linker scripts have a much
8577simpler command set than the scripting language otherwise used with
ff5dcc92 8578@command{ld}. @sc{gnu} @command{ld} supports the most commonly used MRI
252b5132
RH
8579linker commands; these commands are described here.
8580
8581In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the @code{a.out} object
8582file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
8583features to make use of them.
8584
8585You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
8586@samp{-c} command-line option.
8587
8588Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
8589command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
8590blank lines are also allowed for punctuation). If a line of an
ff5dcc92 8591MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
8592issues a warning message, but continues processing the script.
8593
8594Lines beginning with @samp{*} are comments.
8595
8596You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
8597lower case; for example, @samp{chip} is the same as @samp{CHIP}.
8598The following list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
8599
8600@table @code
8601@cindex @code{ABSOLUTE} (MRI)
8602@item ABSOLUTE @var{secname}
8603@itemx ABSOLUTE @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 8604Normally, @command{ld} includes in the output file all sections from all
252b5132
RH
8605the input files. However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can use the
8606@code{ABSOLUTE} command to restrict the sections that will be present in
8607your output program. If the @code{ABSOLUTE} command is used at all in a
8608script, then only the sections named explicitly in @code{ABSOLUTE}
8609commands will appear in the linker output. You can still use other
8610input sections (whatever you select on the command line, or using
8611@code{LOAD}) to resolve addresses in the output file.
8612
8613@cindex @code{ALIAS} (MRI)
8614@item ALIAS @var{out-secname}, @var{in-secname}
8615Use this command to place the data from input section @var{in-secname}
8616in a section called @var{out-secname} in the linker output file.
8617
8618@var{in-secname} may be an integer.
8619
8620@cindex @code{ALIGN} (MRI)
8621@item ALIGN @var{secname} = @var{expression}
8622Align the section called @var{secname} to @var{expression}. The
8623@var{expression} should be a power of two.
8624
8625@cindex @code{BASE} (MRI)
8626@item BASE @var{expression}
8627Use the value of @var{expression} as the lowest address (other than
8628absolute addresses) in the output file.
8629
8630@cindex @code{CHIP} (MRI)
8631@item CHIP @var{expression}
8632@itemx CHIP @var{expression}, @var{expression}
8633This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
8634
8635@cindex @code{END} (MRI)
8636@item END
8637This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for compatibility.
8638
8639@cindex @code{FORMAT} (MRI)
8640@item FORMAT @var{output-format}
8641Similar to the @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command in the more general linker
dc12032b 8642language, but restricted to S-records, if @var{output-format} is @samp{S}
252b5132
RH
8643
8644@cindex @code{LIST} (MRI)
8645@item LIST @var{anything}@dots{}
8646Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
ff5dcc92 8647@command{ld} command-line option @samp{-M}.
252b5132
RH
8648
8649The keyword @code{LIST} may be followed by anything on the
8650same line, with no change in its effect.
8651
8652@cindex @code{LOAD} (MRI)
8653@item LOAD @var{filename}
8654@itemx LOAD @var{filename}, @var{filename}, @dots{} @var{filename}
8655Include one or more object file @var{filename} in the link; this has the
ff5dcc92 8656same effect as specifying @var{filename} directly on the @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
8657command line.
8658
8659@cindex @code{NAME} (MRI)
8660@item NAME @var{output-name}
ff5dcc92 8661@var{output-name} is the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; the
252b5132
RH
8662MRI-compatible command @code{NAME} is equivalent to the command-line
8663option @samp{-o} or the general script language command @code{OUTPUT}.
8664
8665@cindex @code{ORDER} (MRI)
8666@item ORDER @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
8667@itemx ORDER @var{secname} @var{secname} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 8668Normally, @command{ld} orders the sections in its output file in the
252b5132
RH
8669order in which they first appear in the input files. In an MRI-compatible
8670script, you can override this ordering with the @code{ORDER} command. The
8671sections you list with @code{ORDER} will appear first in your output
8672file, in the order specified.
8673
8674@cindex @code{PUBLIC} (MRI)
8675@item PUBLIC @var{name}=@var{expression}
8676@itemx PUBLIC @var{name},@var{expression}
8677@itemx PUBLIC @var{name} @var{expression}
8678Supply a value (@var{expression}) for external symbol
8679@var{name} used in the linker input files.
8680
8681@cindex @code{SECT} (MRI)
8682@item SECT @var{secname}, @var{expression}
8683@itemx SECT @var{secname}=@var{expression}
8684@itemx SECT @var{secname} @var{expression}
8685You can use any of these three forms of the @code{SECT} command to
8686specify the start address (@var{expression}) for section @var{secname}.
8687If you have more than one @code{SECT} statement for the same
8688@var{secname}, only the @emph{first} sets the start address.
8689@end table
8690
793c5807
NC
8691@node GNU Free Documentation License
8692@appendix GNU Free Documentation License
36f63dca 8693@include fdl.texi
704c465c 8694
370b66a1
CD
8695@node LD Index
8696@unnumbered LD Index
252b5132
RH
8697
8698@printindex cp
8699
8700@tex
7ca01ed9 8701% I think something like @@colophon should be in texinfo. In the
252b5132
RH
8702% meantime:
8703\long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
8704\centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
8705\centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
8706\centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
8707\centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
8708\centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/} and}
8709\centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
8710\centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
8711\page\colophon
7ca01ed9 8712% Blame: doc@@cygnus.com, 28mar91.
252b5132
RH
8713@end tex
8714
252b5132 8715@bye
This page took 2.491361 seconds and 4 git commands to generate.